Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory M&E Specification: Electrical Installation

DAMEN SONG CAM SHIPYARDS
HAI PHONG CITY

Part B: Electrical Installation
Damen Song Cam Shipyard Company

06 March 2012
M&E Specifications
RHV project: 1368
SPECIFICATIONS
Document title
Document short title
Damen Song Cam Shipyard Project

M&E Specifications
Electrical Installation
Status
Final
Project name
Damen Song Cam Shipyards Factory
Project number
RHV-1368
Client
Damen Song Cam Shipyard Company

Attn: Mr.Gerrit Jan Van Ommen; Mr. Nguyen Tri Dzung
Reference
1368/KS/HCMC/Specs/001
Approved by
Mr. Meindert Wiersma
Date/initials approval
10th January 2012
Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

M&E Specification: Electrical Installation
08 March 2012
Page |2
SPECIFICATIONS
Contents
Page
1
FUNCTIONALDESCRIPTION
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 General
1.1.2 Qualityandreliability
1.1.3 GeneralRequirements
1.2
STANDARDS&REGULATIONS
1.2.1 Electricalinstallations
1.3
DESIGNCRITERIA
1.3.1 General
1.3.2 Climateconditions
1.3.3 Performancesforthebuildings
1.4
ELECTRICALINSTALLATIONS
1.4.1 Centralelectricalprovisions
1.4.2 LoadEvaluation
1.4.3 Powerdistributioninstallation
1.4.4 Lighting
1.4.5 EarthingInstallation
1.4.6 Lightning
1.4.7 Communicationinstallations
1.4.8 Protectioninstallations
1.4.9 Transportinstallations
GENERALREQUIREMENTSFORELECTRICALWORKS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
GENERAL
EXAMINATIONOFSITEANDDRAWINGS
PERMITS,FEESANDINSPECTIONS
CONTRACTDRAWINGS
SHOPDRAWINGS,BUILDERSWORKDRAWINGANDMATERIALSUBMITTALS
RECORD(ASBUILT)DRAWINGS
OPERATIONALANDMAINTENANCEMANUALS
TEMPORARYSERVICE
COOPERATION
EXISTINGWORKANDEQUIPMENT
SUPERVISION
CLEANING
ACCESSIBILITY,ACCESSPANELSANDDOORS
CONTRACTORSRESPONSIBILITY
HIGHVOLTAGENETWORK
AUTHORITIESAPPROVAL
REGULATIONS
DEFINITIONS
PHASEIDENTIFICATION
VOLTAGEDROP
TELECOMMUNICATIONSINTERFERENCE
SEGREGATIONOFSERVICES
BUILDERSWORK
FOUNDATIONBOLTSANDSUPPORTS

13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
16
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
08 March 2012
Page |3
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
2.31
2.32
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
2.37
3
DESIGNANDSTANDARDISATION
MATERIALS,SHOPDRAWINGSANDWORKMANSHIP
SAMPLES
STORAGEOFPLANTANDEQUIPMENT
PAINTING(ELECTRICALPLANTANDEQUIPMENT)
LABELS
INSPECTIONANDTESTSATMANUFACTURERSWORK
TESTINGANDCOMMISSIONINGATSITE
SYSTEMACCEPTANCE
CORRECTIONAFTERCOMPLETION
GUARANTEES
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULEOFMANUFACTURES
MVSWITCHGEAR
3.1
SCOPE
3.1.1 General
3.1.2 Equipmentcovered
3.1.3 Specificrequirements
3.2
APPLICABLESTANDARDS
3.2.1 IECStandards
3.2.2 Otherstandards
3.2.3 Localstandards
3.2.4 EMCdirective
3.3
LOCALCONDITIONS
3.3.1 Tropicalclimates
3.3.2 Altitude
3.4
DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Ratings
3.4.3 Systemvariation
3.4.4 Performancerequirements
3.4.5 Temperaturerise
3.5
CONSTRUCTIONREQUIREMENTS
3.5.1 Internalarrangement
3.5.2 Housing/Enclosure
3.5.3 InterchangeAbility
3.5.4 Anticondensationprecautions
3.5.5 Arcingfaults
3.5.6 Insulation
3.5.7 Insulationlevel
3.5.8 Busbarsystems
3.5.9 Compartmentsandpartitionsetc.
3.5.10 MVswitchingdevices
3.5.11 Terminals
3.5.12 Isolatingfacilities
3.5.13 Protectivedevices
3.5.14 Earthing
3.5.15 Ratingplatesandnameplates
3.5.16 Finishing
3.5.17 Erection

49
50
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
65
66
66
66
66
67
67
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
75
76
77
83
84
84
85
08 March 2012
Page |4
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.18 Toolsandtestingequipment
3.5.19 Spareparts
3.6
BATTERY/RECTIFIERUNIT(IFREQUIRED)
3.7
INSPECTIONANDTESTING
3.7.1 General
3.7.2 Routinetests
3.7.3 Typetests
3.7.4 Specialtests
3.7.5 Siterequirements
3.8
PACKINGANDSHIPMENT
3.9
DATAREQUIREMENTS
4
TRANSFORMERS
4.1
SCOPE
4.1.1 General
4.1.2 Transformerscovered
4.2
APPLICABLESTANDARDS
4.2.1 IECStandards
4.2.3 EMCdirective/LVdirective
4.3
LOCALCONDITIONS
4.3.2 Altitude
4.4
4.4.1 General
4.4.2 Ratings
4.4.3 Systemvariations
4.4.5 Impedancevoltageandshortcircuitcurrents
4.4.6 Vectorgroup
4.4.7 Noiselevel
4.4.8 Installation
4.5
4.5.1 Internalarrangement
4.5.2 Tankorenclosure
4.5.3 Windings
4.5.4 Insulation
4.5.5 Oilandfilling
4.5.6 Terminals
4.5.7 Cableconnection
4.5.8 Offloadtapchangers
4.5.9 Earthing
4.5.10 Fittingsandaccessories
4.5.11 Ratingplate
4.6
4.6.1 Inspection
4.6.2 Testing
4.7
PACKINGANDSHIPMENT
4.8
DOCUMENTREQUIREMENTS
DIESELGENERATORSET

85
85
86
87
87
87
88
88
89
91
92
92
92
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
97
98
98
98
99
100
100
100
101
102
102
102
104
105
105
08 March 2012
Page |5
SPECIFICATIONS
5.1
SCOPE
5.1.1 General
5.1.2 Equipmentcovered
5.1.4 Maintenancecontract
5.2
APPLICABLESTANDARDS
5.2.1 Internationalstandards
5.2.3 CEdirective
5.3
LOCALCONDITIONS
5.3.2 Altitude
5.3.3 EnvironmentalconditionsEDGset
5.4
5.4.1 General
5.4.2 Systemvariations
5.4.3 Operation
5.4.4 Flexiblecoupling
5.4.5 Noiselevel
5.4.6 Vibration
5.4.7 Directionofrotation
5.4.8 Paralleloperation
5.5
DIESELENGINE
5.5.1 General
5.5.2 Coolingsystem
5.5.3 Lubricationsystem
5.5.4 Enginestartersystem
5.5.5 EngineGovernor/Control
5.5.6 Fueltank
5.6
GENERATOR
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Standardratings
5.6.4 InsulationandWindings
5.6.5 Degreeofprotection
5.6.6 Shortcircuitcurrents
5.6.7 Waveform
5.6.8 Criticalspeed(voltagecontrol)
5.6.9 Ventilation
5.6.10 Spaceheaters
5.6.11 Drainholes
5.6.12 Cableboxes
5.6.13 RotorandVibrations
5.6.14 Bearings
5.7
CONTROL
5.7.1 General
5.7.2 Housing/enclosureControlPanel
5.7.3 Anticondensationprecautions
5.7.4 Arcingfaults
5.7.5 PartsoftheControlPanel
5.7.6 DieselEngineMonitoring
105
105
105
106
106
107
107
108
108
109
109
109
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
111
112
112
112
113
113
114
114
114
114
115
115
115
115
115
115
116
116
116
116
116
117
117
117
117
117
117
118
08 March 2012
Page |6
SPECIFICATIONS
5.7.7 GeneratorProtection
5.7.8 Wiring/cabling
5.8
5.8.1 General
5.8.2 Pipework
5.8.3 Mounting
5.8.4 Corrosionprotection
5.8.5 Nameplatesandtagging
5.9
5.10 DATAREQUIREMENTS
5.11 PACKINGANDSHIPMENT
119
119
120
120
120
120
120
120
121
122
123
LOWVOLTAGEDISTRIBUTION
123
6.1
MAINDISTRIBUTIONANDSUBMAINDISTRIBUTIONBOARD
6.1.1 General
6.1.2 Meteringandindication
6.1.3 Panelwiring/TerminalBlocks/Labels
6.2
MOTORCONTROLCENTERS(MCC)FORM2
6.2.1 General
6.2.2 Starters
6.2.3 Fixings
6.2.4 IdentificationandReferencing
6.2.5 ControlPanelComponents
6.2.6 SelectorSwitches
6.2.7 CompensatedEquipment
6.2.8 Timeswitchcontrol
6.2.9 ControlRelays
6.2.10 CircuitProtection
6.3
TESTS
6.3.1 Typetest
6.4
DRAWINGSANDINFORMATION
6.5
MCBDISTRIBUTIONBOARDS
6.5.1 Description
6.5.2 Enclosures
6.5.3 Busbar
6.5.4 Breakers
6.6
AIRCIRCUITBREAKERS
6.7
MOULDEDCASECIRCUITBREAKER
6.8
DISCONNECTSWITCHES
6.9
EARTHLEAKAGECIRCUITBREAKER(ELCBS)
6.10 CONTACTORS/OVERLOADRELAYS/CONTROLRELAYS/TIMERS
6.10.1 Contractors
6.10.2 OverloadRelays
6.10.3 Timers
6.10.4 Timers
6.11 INDICATIONLAMPS/PUSHBUTTONS/SELECTORSWITCHES
6.11.1 Indicatinglamps
6.11.2 PushButtons
6.11.3 SelectorSwitches
6.12 SITECONDITION
6.13 CODESANDSTANDARDS
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
129
130
130
131
132
132
132
132
132
133
134
135
136
137
137
137
137
137
138
138
138
138
139
139
08 March 2012
Page |7
SPECIFICATIONS
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
VOLTMETER,AMETER&POWERFACTORMETER
SWICHBOARDOPERATORSSMAT
COORDINATION
HARMONICANALYSER
THERMALIMAGING
ENERGYMONITORINGUNIT
141
142
142
142
142
142
POWERFACTORCORRECTION
142
UPS
143
8.1
UPSSYSTEM(RPA)
8.1.1 Scope
8.1.2 EquipmentSummary
8.1.3 EquipmentConfiguration
8.1.4 UPSComponentsDescription
8.1.5 OperatingPanelandDisplay
8.1.6 Communication
8.1.7 StandardsandRegulations
8.1.8 SubmittalsandProposals
8.1.9 Installation
8.1.10 TestingandCommissioning
9
VARIABLEFREQUENCYDRIVES
9.1
GENERAL
9.1.1 GeneralDescription
9.1.2 Scopeofsupply
9.1.3 SuppliedbyContractor
9.1.4 CodesandStandards
9.1.5 EnvironmentalConditions
9.1.6 ProductDeliveryandHandling
9.2
PRODUCTS
9.2.1 General
9.2.2 DesignRequirements
10 CABLESANDWIRING
10.1 GENERAL
10.2 TEMPORARYWIRING
10.3 CABLE
10.4 CABLEINSTALLATION
10.4.1 General
10.4.2 FireBarriers
10.4.3 CablesInstalledUnderground
10.4.4 CablesSheathofexternalCables
10.4.5 CablesandCablesTrenchMarking
10.4.6 JointingandTerminations
10.4.7 FlexibleFireResistanceCables(FireAlarm+CentralEmergencySystem)
10.5 CABLESTYPES
11 CONDUITS&ACCESSORIES
11.1 CONDUITSANDACCESSORIES
11.2 FLEXIBLEGICONDUITS
11.2.1 StandardsforMetalFlexibleConduit
143
143
144
144
148
151
154
154
155
155
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
158
159
160
160
160
163
163
165
166
168
168
168
168
169
169
170
170
172
172
172
173
173
08 March 2012
Page |8
SPECIFICATIONS
11.2.2 Flexibleconduit
11.3 CONDUITINSTALLATION
11.4 GENERALWIRINGTRUNKING
11.5 CABLETRAYS
11.5.1 Submittals
11.5.2 QualityAssurance
11.5.3 Sequencing&Scheduling
11.5.4 MaterialsandFinishes
11.5.5 CableTray/TrayAccessories
11.5.6 SourceQualityControl
11.5.7 Execution
11.5.8 Installation
11.5.9 Grounding
11.5.10 FieldQualityControl
11.5.11 Protection
12 LIGHTING
12.1 LIGHTINGEQUIPMENT,GENERALREQUIREMENTS
12.2 EVACUATIONANDEMERGENCYLIGHTING
12.2.1 General
12.2.2 Evacuationlighting
12.2.3 Emergency(safety)lighting
12.3 EXTERNALLIGHTING
12.4 SCHEDULEOFLIGHTFITTINGS
13 TELECOMMUNICATIONSYSTEM
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Introduction
13.2 STANDARDSANDREGULATIONS
13.3 RESPONSIBILITIESOFTHECONTRACTOR
13.4 SCOPEOFWORK
13.5 IMPLEMENTATION
13.5.1 ConformanceoftheInstallationtoSpecification
13.5.2 InstallationHandover
13.5.3 SystemTests
13.5.4 FinalCableDocumentation
13.5.5 FinalSignOff
13.6 WARRANTY
13.7 SYSTEMREQUIREMENTS
13.7.1 GeneralOrganization
13.7.2 Principles
13.7.3 Fibrebackbone
13.7.4 HorizontalCopperCable
13.7.5 BuildingDistributor
13.7.6 FloorDistributor
13.7.7 Grounding
13.7.8 IdentificationofLocation
13.8 COMPONENTSPECIFICATIONS
13.8.1 CopperConnectors
13.8.2 FibreConnectors
13.8.3 WallOutletsandTOs(RJ45)
173
174
176
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
181
181
181
181
183
184
184
184
184
184
185
185
186
186
187
187
188
188
188
188
188
189
190
190
190
190
191
191
191
191
191
193
08 March 2012
Page |9
SPECIFICATIONS
13.8.4 PatchPanels
13.8.5 PatchcordOrganization
13.8.6 PatchCables
13.8.7 CopperCable
13.9 FIBRECABLE
13.10
ACTIVECOMPONENTS
14 LIGHTNINGANDEARTHING
193
193
193
194
195
196
196
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Airterminationnetwork
14.1.2 Downconductor
14.1.3 Earthingandbonding
14.1.4 InterfaceTestclamp
14.1.5 Testing
14.2 ELECTRONICSYSTEMSURGEPROTECTION
196
197
197
197
198
199
200
15 ANALOGUEADDRESSABLEFIREALARM
201
15.1 ANALOGUEADDRESSABLEFIREALARMSYSTEMANDVOICEEVACUATIONSYSTEM
15.1.1 General
15.2 SEQUENCEOFOPERATION
15.3 VOICECOMMUNICATION
15.4 POWERREQUIREMENTS
15.5 FIREALARMCONTROLPANEL
15.6 OUTPUT
15.7 MULTIPLEADDRESSABLEPERIPHERALNETWORK
15.8 PRINTER
15.9 ADDRESSABLEDEVICETYPES
15.9.1 General
15.9.2 AddressableSensors
15.9.3 HeatSensor
15.10
PHOTOELECTRICSENSOR
15.11
ADDRESSABLEPULLSTATION
15.12
CONTROLMODULES
15.13
MONITORMODULES
15.14
LINEPOWEREDISOLATORS
15.15
ADDRESSABLEDEVICESUPERVISION
15.16
FIREFIGHTER'SPHONEJACK
15.17
NOTIFICATIONAPPLIANCES
15.18
STROBESWITHSPEAKER(SINGLEUNIT)
15.19
LOUDSPEAKERS
15.20
AUDIO/VISUALALARMINDICATINGAPPLIANCE
15.21
DCVIBRATINGBELLS
15.22
GRAPHICCOMMANDCENTRE
15.23
BEAMDETECTOR
15.24
WIRING
15.25
BMSINTEGRATION
16 CCTVSYSTEM
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 WorkDescription
16.1.2 SystemDescription
16.2 SPECIFICATIONOFEQUIPMENTSANDMATERIALS
201
201
203
204
205
206
206
206
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
209
209
209
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
210
211
211
211
211
211
212
212
08 March 2012
P a g e | 10
SPECIFICATIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
Control console
PC & Monitor
Network Video Recorder
CCTV Camera
212
213
213
214
17 AUTOMATICCONTROLSYSTEM
218
17.1 AUTOMATICCONTROLSYSTEM(INTEGRATEDBUILDINGMANAGEMENTSYSTEM)
17.1.1 General
17.1.2 ScopeofWorks
17.1.3 QualityAssurance
17.1.4 SystemConfiguration
17.2 CENTRALHARDWARE
17.2.1 IBMSServer
17.2.2 Printers
17.2.3 DDCHardwareRequirement
17.3 FIELDDEVICES
17.3.1 ControlValve
17.3.2 Differentialpressureswitchforairfilter
17.3.3 DuctTemperatureSensor
17.3.4 Thermostats
17.3.5 Electricalwiring
17.4 ELECTRICALINSTALLATIONRELATEDTOBAS
17.4.1 General
17.4.2 MainAirConditioningSwitchboards
17.4.3 ControlPanels
18 LIFTS
218
218
218
219
219
221
221
221
222
227
228
228
228
229
229
230
230
231
231
232
18.1 LIFTS
18.1.1 Lift1:
18.1.2 Lift2:
18.2 GENERAL;
232
232
232
232
19 ATTACHMENTS
233
19.1
CONSUMERLIST

233
08 March 2012
P a g e | 11
SPECIFICATIONS
Mailing list:
Damen :
RH:
Mr.Gerrit Jan Van Ommen (ProjectDirector)

Mr. Nguyen Tri Dzung (Project Management)
Mr. Nguyen Anh Tuan (Project Management)
Mr. Nguyen Huy Anh (Financial Manager)
Mr. Meindert Wiersma (Senior Project Manager)

Mr. Roel Philippa (Project Manager)
Mr. Krzysztof Swierczek (M&E Manager)
Mrs. Thanh Bach (project secretary)

08 March 2012
P a g e | 12
SPECIFICATIONS
1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1
1.1.1
Introduction
General
This document describes the conceptual design of the Electrical installations of the
Damen Shipyard in Hai Phong.
Design and build stages
This document, titled Tender Design is the second stage of the design process. It
contains the description of electrical installations in the entire shipyard. Total package of
all specifications, drawings and BoQs shall be used as tender document for the selection
of the contractor who will be responsible for the workshop drawings, procurement and
construction of the electrical installations that are part of the project.
1.1.2
Quality and reliability

For the operations and safety of the Shipyard the presence of the electric power is
essential. Redundancy in electric power supply is designed.
The design must ensure safety to personnel and equipment during operation and
maintenance of the units.
It is the contractors responsibility to design all systems for power distribution and backup
power supply to meet this safety requirement.
The electrical equipment and installation materials will be high quality in order to ensure
reliability in operation and will have a minimum design life of 15 years.
The contractor must guarantee the maintainability and availability of spare parts during
the minimum design life period of 15 years.
1.1.3
General Requirements
The general requirements and general technical requirements will be given in the
Sections 2 till 18. These sections have the purpose to indicate the quality-level and have
not the function to be totally complete in this stage. In the final design stage the contractor
has to complete these Technical Requirements.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 13
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2
1.2.1
Standards & Regulations

Electrical installations
Vietnamese Building Safety Regulations
Vietnamese Building Construction Regulations
Vietnamese Fire Regulations
TCVN Electrical Standards
Relevant international standards as applicable with particular reference to the following:
- IEC 60364
Electrical installations of buildings;
- IEC 60038
Standard voltages;
- IEC 60227
PVC-insulated cables of rated voltage up to and including 450/750 V;
- IEC 60332
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions;
- IEC 60439
Low-voltage switch-gear and control-gear assemblies.
Standards for data cabling systems:
- ISO/IEC 11801IT Generic cabling for customer premises;
- ISO/IEC 14763IT Implementation and operation of customer premises cabling;
- TIA/EIA 568B
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard;
Other Standards listed in equipment specifications.
1.3
1.3.1
Design Criteria
General
The general design criteria for the installations are:
Components shall be taken from the preferred supplier list and from standard
catalogues of respectable manufacturers, available locally and easy to maintain;
Reliable, good quality, flexible, easy to maintain and accessible.
The design of the installations shall be in relation with the local conditions in and
outside the buildings. In particular the effect of the high relative humidity,
temperature, and dust shall be taken into account.
1.3.2 Climate conditions

1.3.2.1 Location
Place
Altitude
Time zone
:
:
:
Hai Phong, Vietnam

At sea level
GMT (+7)
1.3.2.2 Design Conditions

Outdoor Design Conditions
Condition
Temperature
Wind speed
Summer
37,2 / 29,4 Cdb/Cwb
4 m/s
Winter
10,0 / 5,6 Cdb/Cwb
4 m/s
1.3.3 Performances for the buildings

1.3.3.1 Thermal Comfort
See building performances as indicated in the Mechanical part.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 14
SPECIFICATIONS
1.3.3.2 Visual Comfort
The following light intensities will be used.
Function
Outfitting Hall
Offices
Toilets
Storage
Technical areas
Lighting level
300 lx
500 lx
200 lx
200 lx
200 lx
Areas where direct sunlight will shine on the glass walls a sunblind protection will be
used.
1.4
1.4.1
Electrical installations
Central electrical provisions
Power supply
The Shipyard shall obtain power supply from the Power Company of Hai Phong area.
In the beginning, due to MV network under development in the area, only 10 kV network
will be available with 500kVA power allowance for connection. Later 22 kV net will be built
and connected to the shipyard with the power allowance according to factory
requirements. Therefore following measures are undertaken:
Double MV voltage transformers are designed (22/10/0.4 kV),
24kV insulation for MV switchboards and cabling is designed.
NOTE: These double voltage conditions apply only in case the Power Company is not
ready with 22kV supply before tendering time. Successful Contractor shall agree these
items with the Client prior to order placement.
Full back up power generators are designed to run the shipyard till the final power supply
is available.
The incoming power from nearest MV overhead line pole as shown on MV schematic
diagram will enter the Service Substation building MV main switchgear. This switchgear
will feed the ring main units within the shipyard. All major buildings will have their own
substations. Spare feeders and spare space is provided for future shipyard extension.
Bus section breaker is provided for isolating the ring from the supply side and for
automatic change over in case of power break. PLC control has to be provided by the
Contractor/Supplier to isolate the network supply side in case of power failure and switch
on the generator supply on to feed the entire network. The Contractor shall deliver and
install an UPS to feed the protection, PLC and signal circuits as shown on schematic
drawings. Parallel operation of external power supply and emergency generators is not
allowed.
Low Voltage network will be: 220/380V, 50 Hz.
The LV power system shall be of type: TN-S, which means separate conductors of neutral
and earth from source. Reduced cross-section of neutral conductors is not allowed.
Emergency power supply
- Emergency power generator is required. Two generators of 1250kVA continuous
rating are designed for the first stage of shipyard construction as per this design
scope. Later other generators can be added in similar configuration.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 15
SPECIFICATIONS
The general emergency lighting for the Outfitting Building shall be supplied by a
centralized battery system (UPS). The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPSs) shall be
installed in the Office Building Substation.
- The escape lighting luminaries shall be supplied with built in batteries (self contained).
Emergency generators will work on MV network. Therefore a step up transformer
0.4/10/22 kV is designed to allow for connection of generators onto the network. This
transformer will work also as step down unit for the power supply of Service Substation,
Guard House building and PON building due to long distance from other substation.
Emergency generators and step up transformer shall be placed in containerized
enclosures as shown on layout drawings. Generator breakers, main breaker and
synchronization/load sharing panel shall be located together with the transformer. In case
of power failure, a signal from voltage transformers on the MV incomer, shall cause the
PLC control system to initiate starting the generators and switch off the MV bus coupler.
After synchronization the main generator LV breaker shall close and the factory will be
supplied from generators. If the power demand is smaller than 1000kVA then 1 generator
should stop. PLC shall select which one, based on previous switching so both generators
running time is almost the same.
On power return, after set delay, the reverse action should take place. The LV generator
breaker shall be switched off and MV bus coupler breaker switched on. After cooling time
the generator(s) should stop.
-
1.4.2
Load Evaluation
Power estimation is shown in the attached Consumer List.
This attachment shows the preliminary load estimate of the main power and lighting
consumers.
During the Construction Design the load estimates shall be optimized according the
manufacturers information.
1.4.3 Power distribution installation

1.4.3.1 MV and LV rooms and transformers (Substations)
MV and LV rooms and transformers are located in following buildings:
Office Building
Carpentry Building
Ship Lift Control building
General Store building
The Substation rooms shall be provided with the installations as lighting, outlets, earthing
all in accordance to the TCVN regulations.
The main loads (chillers, AHUs, fire pumps and compressed air installation) are located
in the technical rooms and on the roof of Office Building.
Special service points will be installed for the works to be carried out on ships for their
outfitting both in the Outfitting Hall and on the floating jetty. These service points shall be
equipped with 220/48V transformers as shown and specified on drawings.
The main LV-room of each Substation will house the main distribution boards. The main
LV-room is situated adjacent to the transformer(s) room. The LV-room shall be provided
with the lighting, outlets, earthing etc.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 16
SPECIFICATIONS
The Substation in Office Building will also house the UPS systems for emergency lighting.
1.4.3.2 Power distribution inside the Outfitting Building
Inside this building, both at floor level and on service platforms service cabinets shall be
located with outlets type CEE-form:
4 x 16 Amp / 1 phase
Transformer 220/48V
Flexible cables from the service cabinets laid on swinging arms, as shown on detail
drawings, shall be provided and installed by the Contractor, together with connecting
plugs and sockets; plugs at service cabinet connections and sockets on the 9,00 m level,
above the ship deck.
The service cabinets shall be supplied from bus bar systems. These bus bar systems
shall be installed at approximately 5.5 meters height from the top service platform level,
see the installation layout drawings. The Bus Bar systems in combination with the service
cabinets will allow maximum flexibility for connecting loads required for the operations.
Separate bus bars will feed the overhead cranes. These bus bars shall be supplied,
together with the cranes, by crane supplier. The Contractor shall install the bus bar on the
crane beam, supply the isolator switches for them and make necessary connections.
Overhead cranes will be remotely controlled by radio hand control units.
1.4.3.3 Power distribution inside the Carpentry Building
This building will contain Carpentry workshop, HVAC workshop, Electrical workshop,
compressor room with compressors and dryers, fire and domestic water pump room and
auxiliary rooms like small office, IT and maintenance shop.
Bigger receivers like compressors and pumps will have their own supply panel boards as
shown on schematic diagrams. Carpentry machines will be fed from bus ducts hang to
the building structure for better flexibility since the exact location of machines is not
known at this stage. Dust collection system is design. The dust collector with its motor is
located outside the building. Its control box shall be installed inside the workshop.
Service distribution boards are planned within the building to feed small equipment.
These will be fed either from the bus ducts or from main particular workshop distribution
boards. The cables will be run on cable ladders and trays, depending on the number and
size of cable and in accordance with wiring and cabling specification. Main cable
distribution layout is shown on drawing.
Fire pumps are located within pump room next to the compressor room. The contractor
shall provide complete package including the fire pump electrical panel constructed and
equipped as described in Mechanical Specification, chapter Fire Protection System.
1.4.3.4 Power distribution in General Store building

The installation principles are the same as for Carpentry building. Additionally the
overhead cranes shall be supplied through the bus bars provided with the cranes. The
08 March 2012
P a g e | 17
SPECIFICATIONS
Contractor shall install the isolator switches and make the necessary connections.
Overhead cranes will be remotely controlled by radio hand control units.
1.4.3.5 Power distribution for Jetty and Cleaning Platform
Stand alone distribution units shall be delivered, installed and connected by the
Contractor. These units shall be equipped as shown on drawings, shall have stainless
steel 316L weather proof enclosures and be installed in coordination with Maritime
Contractor. Equipment to be installed within these cabinets is shown on schematics.
These cabinets shall be coordinated by Electrical Contractor with Mechanical Contractor,
each one producing its own part. Mechanical Contractor shall provide mechanical
services like water and compressed air.
1.4.3.6 Power distribution for Ship Lift
Ship Lift MCC and control will be done by equipment provider. Electrical contractor shall
deliver and install the substation and provide power supply for the MCC from Substation.
In this building a room is left for movable diesel generator in case the Client would wish to
have one connected. Terminals on LV incoming side should be provided by Contractor for
this purpose.
1.4.3.7 Power distribution for PON building, pond pump room, contractor platform
Power supply cables will be installed underground by Electrical Contractor to feed these
buildings. Supply sources are shown on schematic and layout drawings.
1.4.3.8 Power distribution general

Power cables shall be of type LsZH (Low smoke Zero Halogen) with copper core
conductors.
Total load of single-phase power circuits, protected by a device of 16 A, shall not exceed
3000 VA. All apparatus over 1500 VA shall be connected to individual circuits.
More than 3 cables parallel shall be installed in cable trays.
For cost reduction the main loads on the roof can be supplied by bus bars.
Single-phase lighting circuits, protected by a device of 16A and serving more than one
luminary, shall not carry more than 2400 VA. Areas equipped with two separate switches,
shall have separate lighting circuits.
The cable support system which shall be installed comprises cable ladders/trays. All
cable ladders outside the buildings shall be provided with covers, preventing collection of
dust/dirt and protect against direct sun radiation.
1.4.3.9 Switchgear
Switchgear and control gear will be of the compartmentalised metal enclosed type and
will be designed and tested to IEC 60439 Standard or other approved standard by the
Clients Inspector.
All distribution boards shall be provided with minimum 10% spare circuits. The
sizes/ratings of these spares will be similar to the sizes/ratings of the typical circuits in
use. Additional all distribution boards shall be dimensioned with 20% space for future
extension.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 18
SPECIFICATIONS
1.4.3.10 Electrical Protection & Metering
The electrical system will be equipped with automatic protection, which will provide
safeguards in the event of electrical equipment failures or system malfunction. The
protection schemes will consist of a graded discriminatory system selected to enable all
parts of the installation to operate safely, reliably and under control. In the event of a fault,
the system design will isolate only those circuits that are directly affected.
Metering, voltage, Amps, frequency, kWh, shall be at the main feeders of the
transformers. Metering shall also be connected to the building management system.
1.4.4 Lighting
1.4.4.1 Lighting luminaries
All luminaries shall be equipped with appropriate devices and components and high
frequently energy saving ballasts.
The Outfitting Hall shall be provided with high bay dust proof luminaries. At the walls,
additional dust and water proof fluorescent lighting shall be provided.
All walkways, stairs, technical rooms, etc. shall be provided with dust and waterproof
luminaries.
The offices to be provided with build-in luminaries with computer screen friendly louvers.
Lighting controls:
The lighting of the berths will be controlled by push buttons in a lockable box at the main
entrances of the respective berth.
Offices and workshops shall be provided with switches at the entrance doors.
The general emergency lighting will be controlled together with the general lighting
supplied from normal power supply.
The escape route indication lighting will be continuous on.
1.4.4.2 Emergency lighting
A part of the general lighting will be supplied by means of an Uninterruptable Power
Supply (UPS) to ensure a minimum lighting level of 100 Lx at 5 meters from floor during a
power failure for at least 10 minutes. See relevant drawings.
The escape route indication lighting shall be lighting fixtures with their own 3 hours rated
battery back-up inside the lighting fixture. (Supplied decentralised).
1.4.5
Earthing Installation
A common earthing system shall be provided for electrical system equipment earthing,
static protection and lightning protection. The resistance of the common earthing system
to the general mass of earth, measured at any point on the plant site, is not allowed to
exceed 1.
Earth design will take account of soil and sub-soil conditions. Earth electrodes will consist
of copper cable or strip, with a minimum size of 70mm2, connected in mesh formation of
sufficient length to ensure low earth resistance. Connection between earth electrode and
earth cable will be arranged in covered inspection pits to allow maintenance and testing.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 19
SPECIFICATIONS
In case the measured resistance of the mesh formation will be higher than required,
additional vertical copper clad steel electrodes shall be installed by Contractor until the
minimum resistance is achieved. For pricing purpose several such electrodes are shown
on drawings but the Contractor shall have a provision in his price for additional electrodes
if required due to soil condition.
Major electrical equipment such as switchgear, transformers, distribution boards, control
panels, and steel structures, will be directly connected to the earthing system. A main
earth bar will be provided within the main electrical rooms, which will be connected to the
site main earth ring via minimum two copper conductor earthing cables.
Static earthing protection shall be provided by connecting the steel structures to the
common earthing system.
1.4.6
Lightning
A lightning protection system shall be installed on the roofs of buildings to protect them
against lightning in accordance with TVVN Standard for the Installation of Lightning
Protection.
Lightning air terminals shall be copper or copper clad steel approved for use as lightning
air terminals. They shall be mounted on galvanised steel pipe, at the height specified. All
lightning air terminals shall be bonded together and to all metallic parts on the roof.
Down conductors shall be bonded to the building structure. The building structure shall
form conductor to earth. The joints between parts of the construction shall be conductive.
If required, additional copper conductor of 50 sq.mm minimum, at each constructive joint
shall be installed to ensure good conductivity. Splicing and bonding of conductors shall
be done by using compression connectors or by thermo-weld. Down conductors shall be
connected to the ground grid.
1.4.7 Communication installations

1.4.7.1 Data-installation
The service cabinets along the walls inside the buildings and the jetty shall be provided
with 4 data/telephone outlets (type RJ45) with Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling
system. In the main electrical rooms or dedicated rooms patch panels shall be installed
with enough space and 400V outlets for active network components. Patch cables with
sufficient length shall be part of the contract.
The supply and installation of the active network components are not subject to this work.
The technical requirements and specifications will be according the latest technology
standards (CAT 6a). The installation shall be CAT6a certified.
1.4.8 Protection installations

1.4.8.1 Fire detection installation
A Fire detection installation according to the TCVN shall be installed.
The installation consists of smoke detectors and smoke suction system in the Outfitting
Hall with locations as indicated on the drawings. At the fire cabinets and at the
08 March 2012
P a g e | 20
SPECIFICATIONS
entrances/stairs manual fire alarms shall be installed. An evacuation system with slow
whoop and spoken word in combination with flash lights shall complete the fire detection
system. The Fire detection panels shall be provided near the main entrances of the
buildings. A repeater panel for early smoke detection will be placed in the central security
room.
Connection shall be made with the Security and Central Fire Department if required by
Fire Department.
The local fire authorities shall approve the fire safety plan.
1.4.8.2 Security and time monitoring system
Security (CCTV) is required along the shipyard fence.
The CCTV shall be executed as per drawings and attached specification.
Time monitoring system shall be executed as shown on drawings. The Client will provide
the server and finger prints modules. Server shall be installed in the Server Room of
Office Building. Wiring shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified in
Telecommunication Systems chapter 13 of this Specification.
1.4.9 Transport installations

1.4.9.1 Overhead Cranes
Outfitting Hall and General Store will be equipped with overhead cranes as shown on
Structural drawings. Their supply shall be made as described in previous chapters.
1.4.9.2 Elevators
Two elevators shall be installed in Office building. These elevators shall be for persons
as well as goods. No machine rooms are provided for them so the construction of the
elevators shall be such that the motor and gear could be installed on upper floor.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
Scope of works
The Scope of works includes the design, supply, delivery to site, installation, testing and
commissioning of the various complete systems outlined briefly below, and as described
elsewhere in the specification documents.
The contractor shall be responsible to visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of
work, preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities
prior to execution of work. The contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all
materials and workmanship approval during execution and on completion of works
including the connection of permanent power supply and KWH meter. All costs and
charges required by the various authorities shall be included in the scope of work except
the power connection charges which shall be reimbursed by the Client to the Contractor
immediately upon production of actual payment receipts by the Contractor.
MV switchboards and all necessary interconnecting cabling and associated earthing
systems,
08 March 2012
P a g e | 21
SPECIFICATIONS
MV/LV transformers,
LV switchboards and all necessary interconnecting cabling and associated earthing
systems,
Emergency generators with all necessary accessories including the fuel supply system,
Power Factor Correction Capacitors, Regulators and Harmonic Filters,
Variable Frequency Drives,
Bus bar Risers,
Sub main distribution switch gear,
Sub-main distribution cabling including all cable trays, brackets and cleats,
Final sub-circuit wiring including all necessary conduits, trays and trunking,
All general and special purpose power accessories and switchgear,
All electrical accessories including switches, power outlets, isolators, etc.,
Switches and all connections for internal and external lighting installation,
Installation of light fittings, lamps, switches and all connections for internal and external
lighting installation,
Lighting control system,
Lightning protection system, surge arrestors, earthing system and harmonic protection,
UPS Emergency lighting system,
Analogue addressable Fire Alarm system,
Telecommunications System including cable trays, trunking, conduits /wiring, outlet boxes,
accessories, cabinets, ducts, cabling, etc.,
All necessary power supplies terminating in an isolating switch located within 2 meters of
the mechanical equipment/panels,
All coordination with other sub trades to supply and install power supply to the various
equipment including all conduits, ducts for the installation of the control wires by the
equipment supplier.
The work shall comprise the whole of the labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all the
materials necessary to form a complete installation and such as tests, adjustments and
commissioning as prescribed in subsequent clauses and as may otherwise be required to
give an effective working installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 22
SPECIFICATIONS

08 March 2012
P a g e | 23
SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
General
This specification is for the Mechanical and Electrical (MEP) works. However, the
Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of Contract, and Note on Pricing,
Preliminaries Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract applicable to Main
Contract shall be applicable to this contract also.
The term Contractor used in the MEP documents and drawings is to be considered to
mean the Contractor for MEP works.
Contractor shall be responsible for proper performance of all MEP systems in accordance
with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees,
allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functional and acceptable
system.
The precedence of documents and drawings shall be as determined in the Main Contract.
However, consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the
drawings. Consider any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably
implied on the other, as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the
work of this division. In case of discrepancies between various documents the more
stringent shall apply.
The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make
this available as requested to the Consultant.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 24
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2
Examination of Site and Drawings

Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and
limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might
affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or
others.
Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions
before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or
expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 25
SPECIFICATIONS
2.3
Permits, Fees and Inspections

Arrange for inspection of all work by the Local Authorities as and where applicable. This is
to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project. On
completion of the work, present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional
approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.
Pay fees / charges as levied by the Local Authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary
services, connections, etc. at no additional cost to contract unless noted otherwise.
Before commencing any work on site, submit the shop drawings (approved by the
Consultant) to the Authorities, as and where applicable, for checking and approval. Follow
the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities.
Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant
immediately of any such change and obtain his approval.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 26
SPECIFICATIONS
2.4
Contract Drawings
The drawings for services works are concept design drawings, diagrammatic, and intended
to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations
of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate
architectural or structural details.
These cannot be used as shop drawings. Contractor must develop own detailed shop
drawings for work at site.
Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items
from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation
of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.) before
proceeding with the work.
Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and / or equipment necessary
to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns, etc.)
Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed,
provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional
material.
Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures,
emergency lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the
reflected ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with
all trades. These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work
commences on site.
Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or equipment
as indicated and/or supplied by other divisions of work of the contract. Install all pipe runs,
conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and clearances, and to
conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to provide adequate
space for service and maintenance.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 27
SPECIFICATIONS
2.5
Shop Drawings, Builders Work Drawing and Material Submittals

Within 15 days of award of Contract, submit program of works. Along with the program,
submit a schedule detailing proposed submission dates for all Material Submittals, Shop
drawings and Builders work drawings. Allow 15 days review period by the Consultant for
each submission.
Contractor must obtain, from the Consultant, approvals of all materials, equipment and
drawings within appropriate time to facilitate work at site, but, within 75 days latest, from
the Contract award date. This period includes any required resubmissions till final approval
is obtained.
Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings
for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in
tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to
avoid a conflict of trades.
Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to,
all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains,
location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and
agreement of, all trades involved.
Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof
curbs, wall openings, trenches.
Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Generally, the scale shall be
1:50 for layouts and 1:20 for Details and Sections, etc. Forward these drawings, approved
by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide copies in a number as
specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.
Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay in making
these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to
Contractual penalties in accordance with Contract documents.
The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and
all Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical
dimensions, make, performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use
and location before submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to
correspond to the design drawings.
Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,
accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes.
Ensure that shop drawings indicate working weights of all equipment.
The submission of samples, wherever required by Consultant, will be subject to the same
procedure as that of shop drawings. One set of such samples shall be required to be
brought to site and kept there after approval till substantial completion.
The Consultant will mark the drawings "Approved / Approved with comments / Revise and
Resubmit / Not Approved. Contractor shall resubmit accordingly.
The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the
Contractor's drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken

08 March 2012
P a g e | 28
SPECIFICATIONS
by the Contractor to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be considered
as a delay to the contract caused by the Contractor.
The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention to
such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's approval shall not
relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility.
Any approval by the Consultant shall be on the understanding that any item submitted shall
be ordered with options and modifications fully meeting the specification. Any fabrication,
erection, setting out or other work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be
done entirely at the Contractor's risk and cost.
Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper
coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.
Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work.
Submit two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in
inspecting the work.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 29
SPECIFICATIONS
2.6
Record (as-built) drawings

As the job progresses, mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of
installed work. Have the prints available for inspection at the site at all times. 30 days
before commissioning, finalize the As Built drawings and submit 2 sets as draft to the
consultant for checking and approval. Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies
and three sets of prints to the consultant for onward transmission to the client.
Show on the record drawings the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the
building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in
relation to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation
to floor level of the building and give reference dates to Municipal benchmarks.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 30
SPECIFICATIONS
2.7
Operational and Maintenance Manuals

Upon successful commissioning, submit one draft of Operation and Maintenance Manuals
for review and approval of Consultant.
a. Separate binders shall be used as follows:
i.
HVAC.
ii.
Electrical
ii.
Low Current Systems.
iv.
Fire alarm system.
v.
UPS lighting system.
vi.
Plumbing and Drainage.
vii.
Fire and Safety.
viii.
Any Services other than above.
b. The minimum information required is as follows:

i.
Catalogs highlighting the Make, Model and other necessary details for all Material
and Equipment installed.
ii.
List of Local Agents / Suppliers for all Materials and Equipment with Telephone,
Fax and Email address.
iii.
Detailed description of systems operation.
iv.
Procedures for Preventive, regular and the breakdown maintenance, with

Manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Catalog for all Systems/ Equipments.
v.
Commissioning data for all Systems / Equipment.
vi.
List of recommended spares.
vii.
Country of Origin Certificate
viii.
Upon approval of the draft by the Consultant, submit 4 set of manuals to

Consultants for onward submission to the Owner.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 31
SPECIFICATIONS
2.8
Temporary Service
Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific
written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically
allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity for
commissioning and testing, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct
capacity.
Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure
site power at all times.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 32
SPECIFICATIONS
2.9
Cooperation
Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and
arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of the
Contract.
Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.
Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 33
SPECIFICATIONS
2.10 Existing Work and Equipment
Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in
that area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by
him if not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be
deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the
Consultant forthwith.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 34
SPECIFICATIONS
2.11 Supervision
The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,
qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and
Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the
proposed Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise
unacceptable, the onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is
given.
Where the Contractor's staff becomes during the Contract deficient in performance, the
Contractor is to remedy the situation by immediate and appropriate replacement, to
Consultants approval.
Approval of the Contractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the withdrawal of
that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In the event
of such disapproval, Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated above
within 14 days.
In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right
to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a "forthwith" basis.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 35
SPECIFICATIONS
2.12 Cleaning
Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the
premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other
items used in the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the
buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.
Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from overpainting, etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 36
SPECIFICATIONS
2.13 Accessibility, Access Panels and Doors
Any item of equipment requiring maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for
maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts or
other materials.
Install all concealed equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations easily
accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a
minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.
Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all
pertinent information for installation.
Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where
applicable.
Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with
other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to obtain
approval.
Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of
structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a
minimum opening of 600 x 450 mm.
Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations
Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
The access panels shall be constructed and shall have finishing to match surrounding
architectural construction and finishes and shall be to engineers approval or as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 37
SPECIFICATIONS
2.14 Contractors Responsibility
The appointed Contractor shall accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services
to meet the requirements of the Client / Engineer and generally in accordance with this
specification.
The Contractors tender submission shall include for all the necessary material, plant,
equipment and systems to meet the Engineer's approval whether specifically mentioned
herein or not.
The scope of work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
Design Parameters
The electrical system equipment selection and installation shall comply with the particular
requirements listed hereunder:
Site Conditions
All electrical equipment and components shall be selected and installed such as to operate
satisfactorily and safely under the following climatic conditions.
Maximum shade temperature in summer
42 deg. C
Minimum ambient temperature in winter
5 deg. C
Relative humidity max
87 %
Rusty atmosphere
System of Supply
Three phase, neutral and protective conductor (TN).
The system of supply shall be at 380V 3Ph, 50Hz with a maximum short circuit capacity of
50 kA for 1 second at the main bus bar of the LV Switch Board.
The electrical system shall have following system variations at the sub-station:
Voltage
+/- 6%
Frequency
+/- 4%

08 March 2012
P a g e | 38
SPECIFICATIONS
2.15 High Voltage Network
The contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with the local Power Company to
ensure that supplies are available to meet the construction program. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to execute all civil construction work connected with the HV
Distribution Network as required by Power Company. All costs associated with acquiring
permanent incoming mains supply including all civil works shall be included in the contract
except for the power connection charges which shall be paid by the Client.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 39
SPECIFICATIONS
2.16 Authorities Approval
The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with Fire, Power, Telecommunication and
any authorities after obtaining the Consultant's approval, in order to :Approve the shop Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and commencing with the
installation.
Approve any excavation prior to installation;
Acquire main supply connection;
Approve the Fire Alarm, Telephone systems etc.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 40
SPECIFICATIONS
2.17 Regulations
The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition and supplements
of the following Regulations and Standards:
a.
Statutory Regulations of TCVN.
b.
It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the electrical work and installation
meets with the requirements of the relevant authorities and there shall be no
extra cost whatsoever paid by the client due to the requirement of the
authorities.
c.
IEE regulations with latest amendments.
d.
All relevant BS, IEC Standards.
e.
Other appropriate regulations under statute.
f.
Requirements of BS 7671, 2004.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 41
SPECIFICATIONS
2.18 Definitions
For the purpose of this Specification:
a. The definitions given in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations apply.
b. The words "weatherproof" and "dust protecting" shall have the meanings ascribed to
them in the relevant regulations.
c. The words "complete installation" in Clause 1.1 shall mean not only the major items of
plant and apparatus conveyed by the Specification, but all the incidental sundry
components necessary for the complete execution of the works and for the proper
operation of the installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these sundry
components are mentioned in detail in the tender documents issued in connection with the
contract.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 42
SPECIFICATIONS
2.19 Phase Identification
Phase identification shall be as per the latest TCVN Standards.
Function
Marking
Conductor color
3 phase circuit
Phase -1
Phase -2
Phase 3
L1
L2
L3
Red
Yellow
Blue
Neutral
White
Protective conductor
PE
Green and Yellow

08 March 2012
P a g e | 43
SPECIFICATIONS
2.20 Voltage Drop
The voltage drop between the incoming LV switchboard and extremity of any circuit shall
not exceed 4% of the nominal supply voltage.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 44
SPECIFICATIONS
2.21 Telecommunications Interference
The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute
minimum of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to BS
800 or any other relevant BS.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 45
SPECIFICATIONS
2.22 Segregation of Services
The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming
into contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is
impracticable they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other service through a
protective conductor.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 46
SPECIFICATIONS
2.23 Builders Work
To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be
provided in the structure by the Contractor to the Engineer's instructions.
The Contractor shall plan his work so that full advantage is taken of these provision's but it
is the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that all holes and chases are in the required
position and that any additional ducts, holes and chases necessary for the execution of his
work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs, columns and beams are executed in the early
stage of construction of the building.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 47
SPECIFICATIONS
2.24 Foundation Bolts and Supports
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply of, in advance of the delivery of the equipment,
all necessary frames, foundation bolts, nuts, plates, sleeves and anchorages as and when
directed. Specifically, the supporting frames for MV and LV switchboards in Substations,
where the raised floor structure may be to week to support the switchboards, shall be
designed, manufactured, delivered to Site and installed by the Contractor. Switchboard
Manufacturer requirements in this regard shall be strictly followed.
All cable trays, cable trunkings, light fittings and any other electrical components shall be
installed and supported using a standard product recommended by the manufacturer,
where such support is not a standard product range. The contractor shall only use
galvanized material to engineer's approval as a support.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 48
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25 Design and Standardisation
The Works shall be executed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where
continuity of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall ensure
satisfactory operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be
capable of operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or
excessive noise.
Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be
interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Engineer to
prove interchange ability by actual interchanging of the various parts.
Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate
handling of all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).

08 March 2012
P a g e | 49
SPECIFICATIONS
2.26 Materials, Shop Drawings and Workmanship
The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the Consultant's approval on the design and
the detailed working drawings prior to ordering any equipment and commencing the
installation.
Separate drawings shall be provided for each electrical system.
The contractor shall be responsible for preparing a dimensional shop drawing showing the
exact location and mounting height of the different components.
The contractor shall also be responsible for preparing enlarged scale details, sections and
elevations wherever requested by the Engineer.
If requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall forward coordinated shop drawings
showing the exact locations of all services.
In addition to the above, the Contractor shall forward schematic diagrams for all system.
The schematic diagram shall include all details requested by the Engineer.
It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public
areas is of a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes
and the like shall be included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of durable finish and suitable for installation
in a modern building.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are
mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the
Drawings and specifications.
All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE, BS Regulations, UL
Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists,
unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer in writing.
All articles and materials specified to conform to the Standards shall be clearly and indelibly
marked and stamped with the Standard number specified and other details required by the
regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant advice / delivery
notes shall include the Standard number with which they are to comply.
All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, particular
attention shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a
methodical competent manner.
The contractor shall be responsible to replace all the unsatisfactory work to the engineer
without any extra cost and to the standard required by the consultant. This also applies to
any item which is found to be defective in service during the maintenance period or
extended maintenance as appropriate.
No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a
skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade
08 March 2012
P a g e | 50
SPECIFICATIONS
concerned. The Engineer shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his
proficiency to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 51
SPECIFICATIONS
2.27 Samples
Whenever requested, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all lighting
fittings, switches, fittings and other like accessories described in this specification or as
specified by the Engineer.
Such samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval at his offices or
elsewhere as directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for
internal inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or
wrenches.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 52
SPECIFICATIONS
2.28 Storage of Plant and Equipment
All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until
ready for incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned
before installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable
protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables shall be
protected from direct sunlight.
Protect the building and structures from damage due to carrying out the work.
Protect all electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.
The contractor shall be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or
indirectly to any walls, floors, wood work, brickwork, finishes, services, etc.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 53
SPECIFICATIONS
2.29 Painting (Electrical Plant and Equipment)
Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of items such as electric motors,
switchgear, control panels, and similar equipment, to apply a high standard of protective
paint work in the shop before dispatch, this will be acceptable provided any damage to
paint work on the plant and equipment which occurs is made good by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The interiors of control panels, switchboards and switchgear,
finish paint (two coats work) shall comply with the appropriate standard for enamel finish
and the exteriors of such panels shall be of a British Standard colour.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 54
SPECIFICATIONS
2.30 Labels
Identification labels of 'traffolite' or other approved material engraved black on white both in
Arabic and English language unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm 'lino' style
letters shall be fixed on or adjacent to all controls, switches and distribution gear by means
of at least two brass screws. Socket outlets of voltage other than 230 volt AC shall be
similarly identified or engraved.
The labels shall bear the identifications shown on the drawings, such as identification,
designation, function and where necessary, phase and voltage.
Each distribution board shall be complete with a chart protected by transparent plastic and
fixed securely to the inside of the lid indicating details of each circuit controlled by the
board. These details shall contain points of utilization served, number and size of
conductors and type of wiring.
Permanent warning labels, durably marked Earth Connection Do not Disconnect shall be
permanently fixed in a visible position near each earthing and bonding connection.
A mimic diagram shall be provided on each main, sub main panel board and on each motor
control centre.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 55
SPECIFICATIONS
2.31 Inspection And Tests at Manufacturers Work
The Engineer shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during its
manufacture there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on other
premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the engineer permission to inspect as if the plant
and equipment was manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such inspection,
examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation under
the Contract.
All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the
Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places
manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete working
unit. All equipment will be tested at the maker's works to the relevant standards where
applicable.
The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified.
The contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in
writing of the date on and the place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for
testing as provided in the contract and the Engineer shall thereupon at his discretion notify
the contractor of his intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon
receipt of the works tests certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and
equipment and shall then, on giving twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor,
attend at the place so named within seven days of the date by which the contractor has
stated in his notice the said plant and equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor
shall forward to the Engineer six duly certified copies of the test readings.
Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his sub-contractors, the Contractor
except where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labor, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded,
to carryout efficiently such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance with the contract
and shall give facilities to the Engineer to accomplish such testing.
Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site
conditions under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall
give all details of such tests.
As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause
the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect.
The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to Site any part of the plant or
equipment until he has obtained from the Engineer his written approval to the release of
such part for delivery after any tests required by the Engineer in terms of this clause have
been completed to his satisfaction.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 56
SPECIFICATIONS
2.32 Testing and Commissioning At Site
Upon completion of the installation or part of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out
and be responsible for the testing and commissioning all plant, equipment and integral
systems, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of
performing all of its functions in accordance with the specification and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all equipment until each item of
plant, equipment or system or part thereof has been tested, commissioned and accepted
by the Engineer.
Any equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced by new plant by the
Contractor at his expenses and the plant, equipment or system concerned shall be retested and commissioned. No instruction or action of the Engineer shall relieve the
Contractor of this responsibility.
All testing and commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the
relevant Standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this specification.
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days notice of the date after
which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation. Unless
otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on such
day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor. The tests shall as far as
possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.
If in the opinion of the Engineer the tests are being unduly delayed, he may by notice in
writing call upon the Contractor to make such tests within ten days from the receipt of the
said notice and the Contractor shall make the said tests within the said ten days and notify
the Engineer of the days on which the said tests are to be made. If the Contractor fails to
make such tests within the time aforesaid the Engineer may himself proceed to make the
tests. All tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all skilled labor, supervision, apparatus and instruments
required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to
the Engineer six certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Engineer,
the Contractor and an authorized person acting on behalf of DEWA as prescribed in the
appropriate Regulations and Specifications.
If any part of the plant or equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall, if
required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand
such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the
Contract and any expense which the Employer may have incurred by reason of such
further tests may be deducted from the Contract Price.
The Contractor shall include for submission of working drawings for the electrical
installation to the Power Company for approval and shall allow for the procurement of the
Power Company test certificate upon completion of the building following inspection of the
electrical installation by Power Company. Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the
Contractor of his responsibility for the performance of the plant or equipment after erection
as a complete working system in all respects.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 57
SPECIFICATIONS
2.33 System Acceptance
The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have
inspected the system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.
Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system acceptance,
neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The Consultant's
acceptance may be contingent on any or all of the following if applicable:
Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their
technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are
satisfied with the methods of installation, connections and operation.
Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.
Train owner's maintenance staff.
Submit original of all guarantees and warrantees of equipment and systems required as per
contract.
Hand over all keys of panel boards and equipments, passwords for operation systems,
control, etc.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 58
SPECIFICATIONS
2.34 Correction after Completion
Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract during the
Maintenance period.
Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above
and repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work
required by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to
repair damage caused by the failure of any part of this section.
Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence
when the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into
operation. In the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to
the Owner is involved. Contractor shall be liable for such costs.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 59
SPECIFICATIONS
2.35 Guarantees
The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least 12 months after
preliminary take over by the Owner.
All guarantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of whether
the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.
Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges
and sundries.
Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, and then
the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 60
SPECIFICATIONS
2.36 Maintenance
Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working
condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance
period, including all the consumables and spare parts to keep the equipment in best
working order.
Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than
monthly. Breakdown calls shall be attended immediately.
Maintenance period shall be 1 year from the date of handing over for all Electrical works.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 61
SPECIFICATIONS
2.37 Schedule of Manufactures
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS - ELECTRICAL WORKS
All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed
below. No alternate Makes shall be accepted unless all the listed Makes are unavailable.
Materials proposed from listed Makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications.
Country of Origin, where listed, must be complied.
1. MDBs / SMDBs / DBs / MCCs / Changeover Panel / Isolator
.
SR
MAKE
ENCLOSURE
1.
ABB
ABB, Hai Nam,

QTC
Siemens, Hai Nam,
QTC, Sang Tao
2.
Siemens
3.
Schneider Electric
Schneider,
Hai Nam,
QTC
4.
GE
Hoang Trang,
QTC
* For wall mounted SMDBs, DBs and other smaller panels, RITTAL, HIMEL, GMC & ETA
make enclosures may be used.
2. Cables and Accessories
Evertop, LS, Taya,
3. Cables Trays / Ladders
OBO Bettermann - Germany

Wibe Sweden
Cablofil France
QTC, Sang Tao
4.Cable Trunking
Barton
Wiremold
MK
OBO Bettermann
QTC, Sang Tao
5. Heat Resistant Cable ( 90 C)
Tekab
Draka
Ducab
Pirelli
Evertop, Tai sin
6. Wiring accessories

08 March 2012
P a g e | 62
SPECIFICATIONS
S.NO.
Make
White plastic
Slimline metal finish
MK
Aspect
Ultra
MEM
Spectra grid
Contactum
Legrand
Mosaic
Synergy modern
Clipsal
Mega 2000
Contactum
Grid
Gains
classic
Flat plate
Borough
7. GI box
Barton
Decoduct
Appleby
Clipsal
Elektra
Panasonic
An Phuc VN / Cat Van Loi VN
8. Industrial Sockets
Lewden
MK
Legrand
Clipsal
9. PVC conduits and Accessories
Decoduct
Marshall Tufflex
Clipsal
10. G.I. Conduit and fittings
Barton
Maruchi
Walsal
WM Interface
Panasonic
Smart tube
11. PVC Coated Flexible GI Conduit
Kopex
Adaptaflex
Lappcable
WM Interface
An Phuc VN
12. Fire Alarm System
Simplex - USA
Edwards Canada
Gent 34000 - UK
Notifier - USA
Siemens USA
13. Fire Alarm Cable
Pirelli
Firetuff
GST
Cavicell
Evertop, LS

08 March 2012
P a g e | 63
SPECIFICATIONS
14. Earthing system, Lightning

Protection System, Electronic
Systems Protection, Surge
Arrestors
Furse
A. N. Wallis
Erico
Kingsmill
Kumwell
5. Emergency Lighting System
Prazissa Germany
GFS - Germany
Cooper CEAG Germany
Enotec - Germany
16. Capacitor Banks
Comar
Schneider
ABB
Nokian Capacitors
17. Isolators
Moeller
ABB
Schneider
GE
Siemens
18. Structured Cables / Fibre Optic
Corning Corning - ME
Nordex Alpha Data
AvayaTelematics/ Faronics
Siemon Beta
Krone - IAL
19. Active Components
WWP
Cisco
3M
20. PA / Music System
Merlaude - France
Bosch Holland
Bouyer Germany
Bosch, Siemens
21. Coaxial Cables
Raydex
Belden
Commscope
Hirschman
22. Hand Dryer
Bobrick
Siemens
Anda
National
23. Intelligent Lighting Control System
Siemens EIB
Clipsal C Bus
ABB - EiB
F & G - EiB
24. Busbar (5 Bars) / Tap Off Units
GE - USA
Siemens Germany

08 March 2012
P a g e | 64
SPECIFICATIONS
Zucchini - Italy
Cutler Hammer USA
Henikwon Malaysia
Etacom - Belgium
Schneider Electric
25. Variable Frequency Drives
ABB
Siemens
Allen Bradley
Moeller
Danfoss
Schneider
26. UPVC ducts & accessories

for electricity and telephone
cables
Hepworth
Cosmoplast
Gulf Eternite
An Phuc VN / Cat Van Loi VN
27. Cable Glands / Lugs
BICC
Ducab Connect
HAWKE
CMP
Lergrand
28. UPS System
Merlin Gerin France

Liebert Italy
Chloride France
GE Swiss
AROS - Italy
29. Active Filter / Harmonic Filter
ABB
Merlin Gerin
Nokian Capacitors
Circutor
30. Access Control System
ADC Technology Singapore

DSX USA
Bewator UK
Siemens-Germany
Group 4 - USA
Bosch
31. Aircraft Warning Light
Orga Aviation Lighting

Honeywell
Crouse Hinds
Philips
Note: All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Cables,
Central/Group Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Fire Fighting
Dept. approval.
3
MV SWITCHGEAR

08 March 2012
P a g e | 65
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
Scope
3.1.1 General
This specification covers the manufacture, supply, testing, erection, connection supervision
and commissioning of MV distribution gear for alternating current.
The object of this specification is to ensure that MV distribution boards supplied have
proper duty and performance. Though it is not intended to give the full details of design
and construction, this specification sets the minimum acceptable requirements.
In case of differences between this specification and the international standards specified
in clause 2 below, then the more stringent requirements of the two shall prevail.
3.1.2 Equipment covered
The boards covered by this specification are 3 phase MV distribution boards, with working
voltage over 1 kV up to 22 kV.
3.1.3 Specific requirements
The specific requirements and details of the board(s) required are given on the drawing(s)
or accompanying documents. In case of conflicting requirements between this general
specification and the specific requirements, the drawings shall always rule.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 66
SPECIFICATIONS
3.2
Applicable standards
3.2.1 IEC Standards

Unless specified otherwise MV distribution and motor control boards shall conform in
design, material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the IEC Standards
and in particular to the following publications:
IEC 60038
IEC 60051
Standard voltages
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical

measuring instruments and
their accessories
High-voltage alternating current circuit-
IEC 60056
breakers
IEC 60059
Standard current ratings
IEC 60129
(isolators) and earthing switches
IEC 158
IEC 60186
IEC 60242
network control installations
IEC 60255
Alternating
IEC 60265
IEC 60269-1
High-voltage switches
Low-voltage fuses
IEC 60282-1
IEC 60298
gear
for
IEC 60391
EN 60420
combinations
EN 60445
termination
for
centralised
Electrical relays
High-voltage fuses
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control
rated
voltages
above 1kV and up to and including 52 kV.
Marking of insulated conductors
High-voltage alternating current switch fuse
Identification of equipment terminals and of
of
certain
designated conductors, including general rules of
alphanumeric
system
Identification of conductors by colours or
EC 60446
numerals
IEC 60470

Current transformers
Voltage transformers
Standard frequencies
disconnectors
an
IEC 60521
watthour meters
IEC 60529
enclosures
EN 60617
IEC 632
current
High voltage alternative current contactors
Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current
Degrees
of
protection
provided
by
Graphical symbols for diagrams

High-voltage motor starters
08 March 2012
P a g e | 67
SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.2
Other standards
When different standards, namely BS or VDE, are specified on the data sheets and/or
accompanying documents, the latest edition of the specified standards shall be
applicable.
3.2.3
Local standards
Further to the international standard MV boards shall also comply to the local standards
and/or regulations of Vietnam, when these are higher, more stringent or of special nature.
The MV distribution boards shall be in accordance with all applicable requirements of the
local authorities.
The manufacturer shall obtain necessary permits in certificates.
3.2.4
EMC directive
All apparatus, (electrical and electronic appliance together with equipment and
installations containing electrical and/or electronic equipment) liable to cause
electromagnetic disturbance or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such
disturbance shall comply with the local EMC standards and regulations. Where local
EMC-directive and its amendments shall be used which requires that the apparatus shall
be so constructed that:
The electromagnetic disturbance it generated does nor exceed a level allowing radio
and telecommunications equipment and other apparatus to operate as intended.
The apparatus has an adequate level of intrinsic immunity of electromagnetic
disturbance to enable it to operate as intended.
In case of conflict between the European EMC-directive, and amendments, and the local
EMC standards and regulations the most serve shall rule however it is noted that
European EMC-directive and its amendments shall be used as starting point.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 68
SPECIFICATIONS
3.3
Local conditions
3.3.1
Tropical climates
Tropical climates when specified shall be of the following nature:
- Ambient temperatures
:
Max. 50C
Min. 0C
daily average 30Cdaily average 30C
- Relative humidity
:
Max. 100%
- Outdoor conditions
:
Varying from sunny to rain with
3.3.2
Altitude
Altitude where boards will be installed shall not be more than 1000 metres above sea
level.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 69
SPECIFICATIONS
3.4
Design considerations
3.4.1
General
Switchboards shall be designed to ensure safety during all operating conditions,
inspection and maintenance.
Even under extreme conditions of major short circuit or mal-operation there shall be no
danger to persons in the vicinity of the assembly.
3.4.2
Ratings
Switchboards shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency and the
symmetrical breaking capacity of incorporated MV automatic switching devices as defined
in appropriate IEC publication 56 or as specified on the data sheets.
For standard voltages, frequencies and currents reference is made to IEC 60038, 60242
and 60059 respectively.
Medium voltage, current-carrying components shall furthermore be capable of carrying
their rated current continuously at rated voltage and under specified service conditions
without exceeding the permissible temperature limits when mounted in the completely
assembled switchboards.
Selected standard rating for switchboards are those listed in IEC publication 6056.
3.4.3
System variation
All equipment and components of the MV boards shall be capable of continuous
operation at their full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or malfunction at
system continuous deviation of up to and including the following percentages of the
normal values.
- Voltage
10% according IEC 60038
- Frequency
5% according IEC 60242
- Absolute total voltage and
- frequency variations
10%
3.4.4
Performance requirements
All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielectric
stresses resulting from the test duties specified in IEC publication 60056.
3.4.5
Temperature rise
The temperature rise of the MV distribution- and motor control board shall not exceed
temperatures indicated in IEC 60056.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 70
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5
3.5.1
Construction requirements
Internal arrangement
The switchboard shall comprise a busbar system and consist of one or more sections,
each having one incoming feeder panel placed as indicated on the data sheets or on line
drawings of the electrical load. Each section shall be equipped with a busbar connected
voltage transformer for metering supply, preferably to be mounted in the incoming feeder
panel or in a separate measuring panel. In case the total load for metering and control
exceeds the standard rating, a second busbar connected voltage transformer shall be
provided for supply control only.
The current rating of the incoming feeders and the busbars shall in general be of equal
value for each part of a combined panel or as indicated on the data sheets or drawing.
All incoming switches and bus couplers shall be equipped with facilities for padlocking
both in the "in" and in the "out" position.
The lay-out of the operational front and the location of the components of the assembly
shall be arranged in a logical and systematic sequence and standardised throughout.
Alphanumeric notation, generally in accordance with IEC 445, shall be used for
identification and marking of phases, conductors and terminals.
The system of construction for the MV distribution and motor control boards shall be a
factory-built assembly of a standard, well tested design of the draw-out type.
Interchangeable standardised components shall be used where feasible. It is preferred
that spare compartments can be equipped to the maximum rating of the unit without deenergising of the switchgear and control gear.
3.5.2
Housing/Enclosure
The MV distribution and motor control boards shall be of the floor mounting cubicle type,
shall be metal enclosed with sufficient mechanical strength and be equipped with lifting
facilities (eyebolts). The materials of construction shall be properly prepared and treated
against rust or corrosion. The switchgear and control gear shall be self-supporting and
suitable for front entry and operation.
In case of cable cellar, adequate bottom plates shall be provided which at least prevent
access by rodents.
The degree of protection shall be as specified on the data sheets and in accordance with
IEC publication 60529 and shall be minimum as follows:
- with closed doors :
IP4X
- with open doors :
IP20
All components requiring periodical maintenance shall be easily accessible.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 71
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.3
Interchange Ability
Electrically identical components shall be of one type and make.
Withdrawable sub-assemblies containing one or more components with identical
functions and capacities shall be mechanically interchangeable.
Withdrawable sub-assemblies with identical functions but of different capacities might be
mechanically interchangeable provided the sub-assembly can be adapted easily for its
new capacity.
3.5.4
Anti-condensation precautions
Effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the formation of harmful condensation
inside the enclosure, under either operating or non-operating conditions and service
conditions.
If required 220 V - 1 phase space heaters shall be provided.
The space heaters shall be controlled by a thermostatic switch and shall be wired to
outgoing terminals.
3.5.5
Arcing faults
Measures shall be taken to prevent the occurrence of internal arcing faults.
If doubts exist of the effectiveness of these measures, the design and construction of the
MV distribution and motor control boards shall be such as to provide the highest possible
degree of personnel protection against radiation, overpressure and hot gases.
3.5.6
Insulation
Solid-Air-Solid insulation systems where failure of one solid layer does not lead to voltage
breakdown is preferred.
3.5.7
Insulation level
MV components of switchboards shall be suitable for an exposed electrical system with
unearthed neutral, in accordance with IEC publication 60056.
3.5.8
Busbar systems
Busbars shall be of high conductivity electrolytic copper with joints by means of noncorrosive high tensible steel bolts, nuts and washers, and secured against loosening.
Insulated busbars are preferred. Busbars shall be suitable for extension to the left or to
the right as required.
Busbars shall be accessible for maintenance purposes, etc.
3.5.9
Compartments and partitions etc.

Adequate compartments and partitions shall be provided to allow easy maintenance
operation and e.g. fuse replacement.
Main circuit compartments shall always have individual overpressure reliefs.
3.5.10 MV switching devices

3.5.10.1 Execution
MV switching devices shall be of a draw-out type which is tested and certified by an
official authority to meet the requirements of the national/local regulations, but at least
those given in 2.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 72
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.10.2 Type
Switching devices, without fuses may be of the vacuum or SF6 type.
Mechanical interlocks shall be provided on all boards to prevent connecting or
disconnecting the circuit breaker while closed and to prevent the closing of the circuit
breaker unless the separable contact are in full contact or separated by a safe distance.
Correct correlation shall be established between characteristics of fuses and other
protecting devices to ensure that overload and short circuit currents are safely
interrupted by the appropriate component of the fuse contactor combination.
The type of switching device and its operating mechanism shall be selected in
accordance with its duty and the number of load operations.
3.5.10.3 Control mechanism
Rated voltages for closing tripping, control and auxiliary circuits shall be selected from
IEC 60056.
Control mechanism of switching devices may be of the following types:
a) electromagnetically operated with DC control supply;
b) spring-operated hand charged in case of local control only;
c) spring-operated power charged.
All switching devices shall open automatically, be trip-free and have their energy for the
opening operation stored prior to the completion of the closing operation. Furthermore
they shall be provided with a local manual-operated tripping feature protected against
inadvertent tripping.
Power charged spring-operated mechanism shall not require more than 25 seconds for
spring charging.
Power charged spring-operated mechanism of remote controlled switching devices
should be charged when the switching device is in its normal service position.
Switching devices for motor panels shall be protected against "pumping".
All electrical charging and electromagnetic mechanisms as well as the closing control
components shall be capable of operating when the auxiliary or control supply is
between 85% and 105% of its rated value.
Each switching device shall be provided with visual mechanical indicators, one marking
the closed position with "I" and/or a red flag and the open position with "O" and/or a
green flag, and in case of a stored energy dosing mechanism one marking whether the
operating mechanism is charged or discharged. These indicating devices shall be
directly driven by the switching mechanism.
3.5.10.4 Disconnectors
Disconnectors (isolators) are not permitted, even with safety interlocks, except when
used for the separation of fixed and moving parts.
3.5.10.5 Earthing devices
Three-phase earthing facilities at the cable sides and for the busbar system of each
section are required.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 73
SPECIFICATIONS
For this purpose portable or integrally mounted three-phase earthing switching devices
shall be provided for each type of MV switching device.
These devices shall be capable of making and carrying the prospective short-circuit
current at the point of earthing. The earthing devices shall be suitable for local, manual
operation only.
If portable earthing devices are provided, a minimum of two of each type is required.
Depending on the design, padlock facilities for locking in the open and closed position
shall be provided.
When earthing devices are to be applied in a compartment it shall not be possible:
To insert a portable earthing device in the closed position.
To insert a withdrawable switching device into the service position of the

compartment concerned.
To close a fixed-type switching device in the compartment concerned.

Generally, circuits shall not be earthed automatically, i.e. when withdrawing the
switching device the earthing device has to be inserted deliberately.
Outgoing circuits for motor starting may be earthed automatically when the switching
device is being withdrawn.
Clear instructions, preferably pictorial, shall be submitted showing the proper methods
of how and where to fit the earthing devices.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 74
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.10.6 Current chopping
Switching devices shall not cause switching surge voltages which exceed the insulation
level of the connected equipment. Especially in the case of motor circuit switching
devices which force the current to zero shall not be applied unless adequate measures
are taken.
Vacuum switching devices will be equipped with ZnO overvoltage protection devices.
3.5.10.7 Auxiliary contacts
Each switching device shall be provided with at least 2 make and 2 break auxiliary
contacts directly driven by the switching mechanism.
These contacts shall be completely wired up to terminal blocks in the secondary
terminal compartment.
3.5.11 Terminals
3.5.11.1 General
Each panel shall be provided with appropriate facilities for the independent terminals to
connect the MV main cable and the LV auxiliary cables. Types and sizes will be
specified in the requisition and/or data sheets.
The terminal compartments for MV and LV connections shall be effectively segregated,
see IEC 60298.
The terminals shall be so arranged that all connections can be made safely, even when
the assembly is energised.
Suitable terminating facilities of adequate dimensions and thermal rating shall be
provided for each conductor.
Inside the compartments separate terminals or bolts, one for each cable, are required
for earthing purposes.
Efficient means to prevent strain on the actual conductors and cable connection shall be
provided

08 March 2012
P a g e | 75
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.11.2 Terminals for MV cables
Three-core cables:
Cable termination shall be suitable for the specified cable.
For PVC or XLPE type cables dry type cable termination is preferred.
When two or more cables are required, a suitable marshalling box may be required to
obtain uncluttered straight terminal connections.
Single-core cables:
The terminal box and its cable entries on a relevant panel shall be suitable for the
specified cable.
Single conductor entries shall be mounted in non-magnetic plates.
The end sleeves or glands shall also be of non-magnetic material.
3.5.11.3 Terminations for auxiliary LV cables
Terminal blocks fitted with tubular type contacts with non-loosening screws shall be
provided for termination of auxiliary LV cables.
Clamping terminals are not allowed.
Within the panel compartments suitable clamping devices shall be provided for securing
of the cables.
Terminals in current measuring circuits shall be special purpose with suitable bridging
links and measuring facilities.
Specified auxiliary contacts for remote circuits shall be wired and connected to an
accessible terminal block in the vicinity of the cable entries.
Termination compartments for auxiliary and control cables shall have adequate
dimensions, with ample accommodation for the required number of terminals.
Two or more conductor terminations on one terminal are not acceptable unless the
terminals are designed for more than one conductor.
Metal cable glands suitable for the cables specified shall be included in the supply of the
assembly.
3.5.12 Isolating facilities
3.5.12.1 Isolation of main circuits
Switch panels shall be provided with safe means of isolating the circuit side from the
busbar side.
Panels containing combinations of fuses and contactor shall be equipped with isolating
facilities permitting safe changing of fuses by hand.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 76
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.12.2 Interlocks
Interlocks in accordance with IEC 60298 shall be provided to prevent unsafe operation
of the switchboard and shall comprise at least the following features:
They shall permit operating the switching device only when:
- the isolating device in fully operating position;
- the switching device is in a specifically provided test position with the isolating
device in the closed position and the control and auxiliary circuits operative but
with panel control facilities only.
They shall mechanically interlock the isolating device in its closed position when the
switching device is closed.
Alternatively, they shall cause tripping of the switching device upon attempted
operation of the isolating device.
3.5.12.3 Safety shutter devices
The panel shall be fitted with a set of shutters to cover each 3-phase group of stationary
isolating contacts, i.e. both on the busbar and on the circuit side.
The shutters shall open or close automatically by a mechanical drive from the switching
device when the latter is being racked in or out.
Each set of shutters shall be equipped with padlocking facilities in its closed position.
When padlocked, the shutters shall prevent access to the stationary isolating contacts.
Shutters on the busbar side shall be painted red and shall be clearly labelled
"BUSBARS" in large white letters.
Shutters on the circuit side shall be painted yellow and shall not be lettered.
3.5.12.4 Isolating contacts for secondary circuits
The connection in the secondary circuits between the fixed and the moving parts of
panels shall be by means of self-aligning contact.
These connections shall be maintained when the moving portion of the equipment is in
the test position.
3.5.13 Protective devices
3.5.13.1 Fuses
Application requires correct correlation with other protective devices in the assembly.
MV circuits
High-rupturing-capacity, short-circuit current-limiting fuses, shall be used exclusively
and be in accordance with IEC 60282-1.
Application of two or more parallel fuses per phase shall be subject to approval by
the principal.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 77
SPECIFICATIONS
LV circuits
Industrial ZED-type cartridge fuses, in accordance with IEC 269, shall be used
for control, measuring and auxiliary circuits. Alternatively, miniature circuit
breakers may be used for this purpose.
3.5.13.2 Breakers with relays

3.5.13.2.1 General requirements
Selection of relays shall be in accordance with the relevant circuit requirements.
Protective relays shall have hand-reset facilities and operational signals such as flag
indications or other means of indication used on static-type relays, e.g. light-emitting
diodes. Non-tripping relays have only hand-reset facilities.
Special precautions shall be taken that relays will not actuate accidentally owing to
vibrations or shocks, e.g. by opening or closing of doors and switching devices.
If manufacturer's standard equipment is provided with protective relays with trip
functions located on doors, this shall be stated in the quotation and be subject to
approval by the principal.
Preference shall be given to dustproof flush-mounted relays of the removable type,
provided with calibrating and testing facilities. Current-carrying terminals of the relays
shall be automatically short-circuited at withdrawal of the relays.
3.5.13.2.2 Over-current and earth-fault relays
Over-current and earth-fault relays, not being motor protective relays, shall have a
rated current of 1 ampere and shall be of the induction-pattern, inverse time-lag,
definite-minimum time type with the following characteristics:
over-current elements shall have nominal current settings continuous variable
from 50% to 200% of rated current;
the earth-fault elements shall have nominal current settings variable from 10% to
40%;
for both over-current and earth fault elements the setting of the characteristics
shall be variable.
All relay elements shall have hand reset and have a mechanical flag indicator.
3.5.13.2.3 Under-voltage relays
Where motor panels are incorporated, each busbar section shall be provided with an
instantaneous under-voltage relay for a rated coil voltage of 100 V AC.
The drop-out value shall be adjustable between 50% and 65% and the pickup value
shall always be less than 85%.
The under-voltage relay activates a time-delayed tripping relay for each motor. This
tripping relay shall be self-resetting and be equipped with one set of normally open
position and be adjustable from 1 to 5 seconds.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 78
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.13.2.4 Motor protection relays
Each relay combination shall be equipped with two auxiliary relays with flag indicators,
i.e. one hand-resetting relay, indicating instantaneous tripping on short-circuits or earth
faults, and one hand-resetting relay, indicating delayed tripping on overloads or single
phasing.
3.5.13.2.5 Earth-fault relays
For earth-fault protection of MV motors a single-element, hand-reset, flag-indicating,
instantaneous earth-fault relay shall be provided on the medium-voltage relay panel.
This relay shall have a nominal current of 1 ampere and current settings variable from
10% to 40%.
3.5.13.2.6 Restarting relays
General
These relays shall be of the plug-in type. The type and make shall be subject to
approval by the principal.
Restarting relay (RR)
This relay shall have the following characteristics:
Voltage-dip detection level: 65% Un
Voltage-restoration detection level: 89% Un
Memory: 4.5 s
Immediate restart after voltage dips: < 0.2 s
Delayed restart, adjustable between 0.1 s and 30 s, after voltage dips between 0.2
s and 4 s inclusive.
Timing relay (TMR)
This relay shall be of the slow-operating type, adjustable from 0.1 s to 30 s.
Elements with multiple functions such as tripping and alarm duties shall have separate
operating contacts for each function and be brought out to separate terminals.
3.5.13.3 Metering
3.5.13.3.1 Voltage transformers
Voltage transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 60186.
Rating and type

Rated primary voltage depends on system data, which will be stated on the data
sheets.
The preferred secondary voltage of measuring and protection transformers shall be
100V.
Rated output capacity of the transformers shall be matched to cover the burden
required by the equipment connected, and preferably be selected from the range of
standard values.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 79
SPECIFICATIONS
Class of accuracy
Generally, measuring voltage transformers are Class 3.0, except those for
measuring the supply of third parties, which shall be Class 1. If Class 1 is
applicable this will be stated on the data sheets.
Protective voltage transformers shall be of Class 3 P.
The winding connection is depending on the metering and protection system
connection.
Protection
At HV side
:Depending on manufacturer's practice and, whenever necessary,
high-rupturing capacity, short-circuit current- limiting fuses shall be in accordance
with IEC 60282-1;
Fuses, if installed, shall be readily accessible and suitable precautions shall be
taken to enable safe removal and replacement of fuses.
At LV side
: Industrial ZED-type cartridge fuses are preferred.
The connection between transformer and fuse base shall be as short as possible.
All protective fuses shall be capable of handling the inrush currents for all service
conditions, without abnormal ageing or deterioration.
Voltage transformers for automatic voltage regulators shall have no fuses at all, but
shall be connected within the protective zone of the differential protection of the
generator.
Location
Depending on the requirements, the following general rules may serve as a guide
to establishing the correct location of voltage transformers on the assembly.
a) For voltage detection, etc. a measuring transformer shall be connected to the bus
bar of each section.
In addition, however, measuring voltage transformers for incoming units, e.g.
generator and main intake feeders, shall be connected on the supply side.
b) For the control supply of the switching devices of a section, preference is given to
a voltage transformer connected to the busbar side of the section concerned.
Alternative supply sources are acceptable for intake and power plant stations and
large load consumers, e.g. electric-motor-driven compressors for pneumatic
control.
c)
Special arrangements shall be subject to principal's approval or specification.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 80
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.13.3.2 Current transformers
Current transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 185.
Rating and type
Rated output capacity of the transformers shall be matched to cover the burden
required by the equipment connected, and preferably be selected from the range of
standard values.
Rated primary current shall preferably be selected from the range of standard values.
Where required, the current ratio will be stated on the data sheets.
Rated secondary current shall be either 5 or 1 A; for remote metering 1 A only is
acceptable.
Other means of remote indication may be considered and quoted for, e.g. transducer
systems, but shall be subject to approval by the principal.
Short-time thermal current rating of the transformers shall be 1 s.
When the electrical system value requires a time duration of 3 s, the current
transformers shall be rated accordingly.
Class of accuracy
Generally, measuring current transformers shall be Class 3, except those for
measuring the supply of third parties, which shall be Class 1. If Class 1 is applicable
this will be stated on the data sheets.
The over current factor "n" shall be < 5 in order to prevent damage of instruments at
maximum fault current.
Protective current transformers are to be Class 5 P; however, Class 10 P is acceptable
for the protection of e.g. electric motors, capacitor banks, etc.
The over current factor shall be > 10 in order to ensure the proper working of the
protective devices and shall be indicated as follows: Class 5 P 10 or 10 P 10.
Terminals and connections

Secondary terminals of current transformers shall be wired up to a terminal block with
short-circuiting links, located at an accessible place. One side of the secondary
winding of each current transformer shall be connected at this terminal block to the
earth bar.
3.5.13.3.3 Ammeters
Ammeters shall be flush-mounted, square type (96 x 96 mm). They shall have an
element rated at 1 or 5 ampere.
Ammeters in the motor circuit shall have an overload scale of 5 x In.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 81
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.13.3.4 Voltmeters
Voltmeters shall be flush-mounted, square type (96 x 96 mm).
They shall have the following full-scale readings:
- For 3 or 3.3 kV: 0 - 4.000 V
- For 6 or 6.6 kV: 0 - 8.000 V
- For 10 or 12.0 kV: 0 - 15.000 V
- For 15 or 17,5 kV: 0 - 20.000 V
3.5.13.3.5 Watt-hour meters
Watt-hour meters shall have cyclometric registers.
Watt-hour meters for motors may be of the single-element, balanced-load type.
3.5.13.3.6 KW-meters
KW-meters shall be flush-mounted, square type
3.5.13.3.7 Power factor meters
Power factor meters measure in the number of phases as indicated on the data
sheets.
Power factor meters shall have a scale 0,5-1-0,5.
3.5.13.3.8 Counters
Each switching device shall be provided with an operation counter.
3.5.13.3.9 Accuracy
Ammeters and voltmeters shall be of Class 1.5 and watt-hour meters shall be of Class
2.5 as specified in IEC publication 51 and 60521.
Power factor meters shall be class 1.5.
3.5.13.4 Auxiliary circuits
Auxiliary circuits shall be clearly grouped and be protected adequate. All current wires
shall be at least 2.5 mm others 1.5 mm of the PVC type and be able to withstand 2500
V impulse test.
All wires shall be connected to terminals individually and clearly identified at both ends
by ferrules of isolating material or plastic code markers see IEC 60391 in accordance
with the wiring diagram(s).
Connections shall be of non-loosening type.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 82
SPECIFICATIONS
Colour coding of secondary wiring shall be in accordance with IEC 60446. Wiring
between two terminals shall be continuous; joints or interconnections are not allowed.
To accommodate and support the secondary wiring, covered plastic channels, insulated
tubes or plastic strips shall be used.
Secondary wiring shall never be mounted direct to metal. The filling factor for channels
shall not exceed 70%. Where supporting of a wire is not feasible the wire or part of it
shall be as short as possible.
3.5.13.5 Protection of control and auxiliary circuits
All circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers of the airbreak-type or
cartridge-type fuses.
3.5.13.6 Indication and alarms
Contacts for remote alarm shall be normally closed.
Protective devices shall have protective action indication.
3.5.13.7 Mimic diagram
The front of the MV boards shall be provided with a plastic or equivalent line mimic
diagram illustrating the main circuit and its components.
3.5.14 Earthing
Earthing shall be in accordance with IEC 60298, colour coding of protective conductors
shall be in accordance with IEC 604466.
3.5.14.1 Main earth bar
A main earth bar shall be fitted along the whole length of the switchboard. This shall be
made from hard-drawn, high-conductivity copper and be capable of carrying the shortcircuit rating of the board but have a cross section of at least 125 mm.
The earth bar shall be bolted to switchboard frame and equipped with convenient facilities
for connecting of all parts of the switchboard, which require earthing.
Joints in the main earth bar shall be bare copper and bolted with galvanised steel bolts,
nuts and washers, secured against loosening.
For direct connection to the station earthing grid, earthing bolts (M12) with nuts and
spring washers shall be provided at both ends of the main earth bar.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 83
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.14.2 Earthing connections
In addition to ensure adequate electrical continuity between all metal parts of the
switchboard and its cables and the main earth bar particular care shall be taken to
ensure that:
housings of withdrawable switching devices shall be positively earthed in the
service position by appropriate earthing connections;
band joints of compound-filled busbar chambers shall be suitably earthed to the
frame of the switchboard;
the earth connections of voltage transformers and current transformers shall be
made directly from the terminal board to the earth bar.
Means shall be provided of ensuring that the earthing connection of each withdrawable
switching device and voltage transformer to the main earth bar is made prior to its
primary connections.
3.5.15 Rating plates and nameplates
Switchgear shall have a rating plate permanently fixed in the front of the equipment giving
at least the following information:
Rated voltage and frequency.
Rated SC capacity and current capacity of busbars.
Standard to which equipment conforms.
Year of manufacture.
Manufacturer's name, type and serial number.
Weight.
All components (switching devices, contactors protection relays, instruments etc.) shall be
fitted with a rating plate in accordance with the relevant IEC requirements. All functional
units shall be clearly labelled to identify the service. All relays, meters, switches etc. shall
be labelled in accordance with the wiring diagrams. All labels shall be made of corrosiveresistant material with indelible characters in the language of the local country.
Rating plates shall be made of corrosion-resistant metallic material and have indelible
inscriptions in the language specified in the requisition.
Enamelled plates are not acceptable.
Each panel shall be provided with nameplates, mounted on the front of a non-removable
part.
The labels shall be of black non-deteriorating material (e.g. Resopal or Traffolite) and
shall permit inscriptions with characters in white in the language, specified in the
requisition.
3.5.16 Finishing
The painting shall be suitable for the specified service conditions.
Unless specified otherwise painting shall be manufacturer's standard. Manufacturer to
provide particulars of procedures paint and finish colour.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 84
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.17 Erection
Assemblies shipped in transport units shall have these units clearly marked to facilitate
assembly and erection at site. Each transport unit shall be provided with hoisting facilities.
Foundation and erection drawings, in the language as specified, bolts, foundation clamps,
small material, etc., required for erection at site shall be packed inside the transport unit.
3.5.18 Tools and testing equipment
Special tools and equipment required for erection, commissioning, maintenance and
testing shall form part of the order and be shipped together with the assembly.
Voltage detection and phasing-sequence equipment shall be offered as a separate item in
the quotation.
A suitable wall-mounting cabinet shall be provided for all such portable tools and
equipment.
Testing equipment for motor starting units shall be provided with local-on control facility.
3.5.19 Spare parts
Spare parts shall be adequate for start-up procedures only.
A prices Spare parts list for two years of operation is required.
Spare parts shall be adequately identified and packed.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 85
SPECIFICATIONS
3.6
Battery/rectifier unit (if required)

This unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the MV distribution and motor control-boards
and shall provide suitable DC power for opening and/or closing, alarms, etc. The unit shall
consist of a battery of adequate capacity and charger. The battery to be nickel-cadmium
type. The charger to be electronic constant voltage type provided with automatic rapid
charging control and output voltage regulator (via diodes) suitable for the specified AC
voltage. The DC system to be isolated from earth and have an adequate number of
outgoing double pole circuit breakers. The unit shall be provided with main AC switch automatic/hand quick charge selector switch - DC voltmeter - charge/discharge
amperemeter - signal light AC power - adequate protective devices - time delay alarms for
power failure, low voltage, high voltage, charger failure, earthfault, output failure(s), alarms
via handresettable signal lights and one common change-over contact for remote alarm.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 86
SPECIFICATIONS
3.7
Inspection and testing
3.7.1
General
The complete assembly shall be inspected in detail on conformity with the order and
tested for acceptance before leaving the works. The principal or his nominee will witness
the inspection and the tests. The manufacturer shall provide facilities, equipment and
personnel to perform the inspection and tests.
3.7.2
Routine tests
3.7.2.1 Dielectric test

The test shall be performed on the switchboard and its components.
3.7.2.2 Test voltage
The test voltage shall have a practically sinusoidal wave form and a frequency between
45 and 65 Hz.
Unless otherwise specified, the value of the dry one-minute test voltage shall be as
follows:
a) For main circuits:
2 U + 1.000 V
b) For control and auxiliary circuits:
- for control and auxiliary circuits rated to 60 V incl.:
1.000 V
- for control and auxiliary circuits rated 61 V and above:
2 U + 1.000
V
with a minimum of 1.500 V
- for secondaries of current transformers and its circuits connected: 2.500 V
c) The voltages applied to motors, instruments and other auxiliary apparatus, when
tested separately, shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC recommendations.
3.7.2.3 Testing of main circuits
For these tests the control and auxiliary circuits shall be connected to the frame.
The test voltage shall be applied for one minute as follows:
3.7.2.3.1 Main circuits of switchboard with all main contacts closed:
a) between all live parts of all poles connected together and the frame;
b) between each pole and all other poles connected to the frame.
3.7.2.3.2 Main circuit of switching devices with the main contacts open:
a) between all live parts of all poles connected together and the frame of the switching
device;
b) between the terminals of one side connected together and the terminals of the other
side connected together.
Note: The tests under 7.2.3.2 shall be carried out on at least one of each type of
switching device.
3.7.2.4 Testing of auxiliary and control circuits
For these tests the circuits shall be connected for one minute as follows:
a) between all the control and auxiliary circuits of a same group (voltage, current)
connected together and the frame;
b) when appropriate, between each part of the control and auxiliary circuit which may be
08 March 2012
P a g e | 87
SPECIFICATIONS
insulated from the other parts during normal operation and all the other parts
connected together.
3.7.2.5 Insulation resistance tests
The electrical insulation of the switchboard and its components shall be Megger tested.
Each circuit shall have an insulation resistance between phases and between phases and
earth of at least 1.000 ohm per volt nominal operating voltage.
Readings shall be taken at a DC test voltage as near as practically to the peak value of
the nominal operating voltage of the relevant circuit but not exceeding 5 kV.
3.7.2.6 Operation tests
All apparatus shall be tested on operation.
Switching devices shall be tested on mechanical operation and on operation by their
control, for at least 5 operations.
Protection circuits, including relays and other auxiliaries, shall also be tested on operation
by primary or secondary injection of current or application of voltage as required.
Variations in the control supply systems shall be taken into account.
During the tests no adjustment shall be made.
3.7.2.7 Inspection
Following all aforementioned tests the switchboard and its components shall be examined
to ascertain, that not any of its components have been damaged and that all parts are in
satisfactory operating condition.
3.7.3
Type tests
The type tests and verifications comprise:
a) Tests to verify the insulation of the equipment including tests at power-frequency test
voltages on auxiliary circuits:
b) Tests to prove the temperature rise of any part of the equipment and measurement of
the resistance of the main circuit:
c) Tests to prove the capability of the main and earthing circuits to be subjected to the
rated peak and the rated short-time withstand currents:
d) Test to prove the making and breaking capacity of the included switching devices:
e) Tests to prove the satisfactory operation of the included switching devices and
removable parts:
f) Test to verify the protection of persons against approach to live parts and contact with
moving parts;
g) Tests to verify the protection of persons against dangerous electrical effects:
3.7.4
Special tests
Special type tests (subject to agreement between manufacturer and user)
h) Test to verify the protection of the equipment against external effects due to weather
and atmospheric agents:
i) Test to verify the protection of the equipment against mechanical damage:
j) Test to assess the effects of arcing due to an internal fault:
k) Test to detect certain defects in the solid insulation of the equipment by the
measurement of partial discharges:

08 March 2012
P a g e | 88
SPECIFICATIONS
3.7.5
Site requirements
3.7.5.1 Erection
The manufacturer shall be responsible for the transport, the complete installation, precommissioning and commissioning of the switchboard.
The connection of cables is excluded.
3.7.5.2 Pre-commissioning
The work incorporated shall be at least but not limited to the following:
1. Inspect the board assembly for alignment, levelness, tightness of foundation bolts and
bolting in general.
2. Inspect the connections and supports of main and neutral busbars.
3. Inspect the safety features, such as horizontal and vertical separation plates, the
busbar covers, pressure relives, interlock door contact, handle interlocks, remote
interlocks etc.
4. Remove the blocking and/or binding material from switchgear, contactors and relays.
5. Check the control and signal voltage. Ensure that the operating coils, protective
relays, etc. are suitable for actual control voltage.
6. After installation, inspect the contact alignment of draw-out type switchgear and drawout interlock features and auxiliary contacts.
7. Test main circuit for one minute between each phase and earth. (Note: Remove or
disconnect voltage transformers, neon lights, overvoltage protective devices).
See table.
Rated Voltage
Test Voltage
AC rms
AC rms
DC
3.6 kV
8 (10) kV
11 (14) kV
7.2 kV
16 (20) kV
22 (28) kV
12.0 kV
22 (28) kV
32 (40) kV
17.5 kV
30 (38) kV
43 (54) kV
24.0 kV
40 (50) kV
57 (71) kV
36.0 kV
56 (70) kV
79 (99) kV
( ) Values when test replaces routine test at manufacturer's premises.
8. Continuity resistance test of each phase, neutral and earth to each outgoing
compartment to detect any loose connection by measuring milivolts at nominal
current (injected).
9. Measure insulation resistance of each bus from phase to phase to earth without
circuitbreaker and with circuitbreaker "in" but open, using 5 kV.
10. Test indicators and signal lamps.
11. Proof-operate the circuit breakers (in test position), switch disconnectors and earthing
switches from their control circuit, and mechanical close and trip device.
12. Check mimic diagram and circuit indication.
3.7.5.3 Site commissioning
Site commissioning (putting in active operating) of the complete MV switchgear and
controlgear and auxiliary units shall follow proper pre-commissioning and be witnessed by
the factory responsible person at a time to be agreed.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 89
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL MEDIUM OR HIGH VOLTAGE TEST

EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS THE "MEGGER" TEST, BE USED FOR ROUTINE
CONTINUITY CHECKS OR OTHER TEST PRIOR TO FINAL CONNECTIONS BEING
MADE, THEREAFTER ONLY AS STIPULATED ABOVE.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 90
SPECIFICATIONS
3.8
Packing and shipment

If packing is specified on the data sheet(s) or accompanying document(s), then MV
distribution boards shall be packed in wooden type seaworthy crates having sufficient
strength to withstand normal ship handling and transport or be fixed mounted in containers.
The crates shall be marked with principal's name and address, order number, type of
equipment, hoisting points, etc.
Enclosed with the board, the following documents shall be included in suitable wrapping:
- Electrical schematic diagram;
- Electrical wiring diagram;
- General arrangement drawing;
- Foundation plan including foundation loading;
- Operation and maintenance manual.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 91
SPECIFICATIONS
3.9
Data requirements
- Control drawing;
- Foundation drawing(s);
- Outline drawing(s);
- Name/tag plate lists;
- Component arrangement drawing(s);
- Material lists;
- Material descriptive literature;
- Performance data/curve(s);
- One-line diagram(s);
- Elementary/control diagram(s);
- Connection/terminal - diagram(s);
- Type test certificate(s);
- Routine test certificate(s)/report(s);
- Weight data sheet(s);
- Transport/lifting instruction(s);
- Installation instruction(s);
- Operating instructions;
- Maintenance instructions;
- Co-ordination curves showing time-current characteristics of protective devices within
the assembly and working in correlation shall be provided;
- Completed data sheets;
- List of priced spare parts recommended to be on hand during plant start-up and in the
first two years of operation.
Transformers
4.1
Scope
4.1.1 General
This specification covers the general requirements for power transformers and while it is not
intended to give the full details of design and construction it sets the minimum acceptable
requirements.
In case of differences between this specification and the international standards specified in
clause 2 below, the more stringent requirements shall prevail.
4.1.2 Transformers covered
Transformers covered by this specification are 3-phase, double wound, rating 50 kVA up to
3 MVA inclusive, with working voltages of up to 35 kV AC 50 Hz and of the following types:
Oil immersed, hermetically sealed, naturally and/or fan forced air cooled;
Oil immersed breather type, naturally and/or fan forced air cooled;
Dry, naturally and/or fan forced air cooled;

4.1.3 Specific requirements
Specific requirements and details of the transformer(s) required are given on drawing(s)
and/or accompanying documents.
In case of conflicting requirements between this general specification and the specific
requirements, drawings shall always rule.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 92
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2
Applicable standards
4.2.1
IEC Standards
Unless specified otherwise transformers shall conform in design, material, construction
and performance to the latest editions of the IEC Standards and in particular to the
following publications:
- Power transformers
IEC 60076
- Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IEC 60085
- Methods for the determination of the breakdown voltage and power
IEC 60156
- of insulating oils
- Specification for unused insulating oils for transformers and switchgear IEC 60296
- Loading guide for oil-immersed transformers
IEC 60354
- Determination of transformers and reactor sound levels
IEC 60551
- Dry type power transformers
IEC 60726
4.2.2
Local standards
Further to the international standards, transformers shall in any case conform to the local
standards and/or regulations of Vietnam, if these are higher, more stringent or of special
nature.
4.2.3
EMC directive/LV directive

All apparatus, (electrical and electronic appliance together with equipment and
installations containing electrical and/or electronic equipment) liable to cause
electromagnetic disturbance or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such
disturbance shall comply with the local EMC standards and regulations. Where local
EMC-directive and its amendments shall be used, which requires that the apparatus shall
be so constructed that:
The electromagnetic disturbance it generated neither does not exceed a level

allowing radio and telecommunications equipment and other apparatus to operate as
intended.
The apparatus has an adequate level of intrinsic immunity of electromagnetic
disturbance to enable it to operate as intended.
In case of conflict between the European EMC-directive, and amendments, and the local
EMC standards and regulations the most severe shall rule however it is noted that
European EMC-directive, and its amendments shall be used as starting point.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 93
SPECIFICATIONS
4.3
Local conditions
4.3.1 Tropical climates

Tropical climates when specified on the data sheets shall be of the following nature:
-
Ambient temperatures
Relative humidity
Outdoor conditions
:
:
:
Max. 50C
Min. 0C
Daily average 30C
Max. 95%
Varying from sunny to rain with thunder storms or
4.3.2
Altitude
Altitude where transformers will be installed shall not be more than 1000 metres above
sea level.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 94
SPECIFICATIONS
4.4
4.4.1
Design considerations
General
4.4.1.1 Purpose of Equipment

The transformer will be used to supply power to the electrical systems.
The design shall allow continuous full load operation of complete transformer under
conditions specified and in accordance with circumstances specified.
4.4.1.2 Safety and reliability
The transformer shall be of a standard, well tested and proven design which ensures
maximum safety to personnel, maximum service reliability and economic operation for an
operational lifetime of at least 15 years. Design and construction shall be simple and
shall provide good accessibility to components and parts.
All equipment, materials and parts shall be brand new and unused, of current
manufacture, of modern design and of the highest industrial grade, free from all
imperfections that might affect the performance.
4.4.2
Ratings
4.4.2.1 Standard ratings

Transformers kVA and voltage rating shall comply with the preferred values of the
standards specified. Unless otherwise specifically stated to the contrary the rated kVA
shall be based on natural air cooling. Voltage insulation of windings shall be for unearthed
system.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 95
SPECIFICATIONS
4.4.3
System variations
Transformers shall be capable of continuous operation at their maximum kVA ratings and
within their limits of temperature rise at system continuous deviation of up to and including
the following percentage values of the rated system ones:
- Voltage
:5%
- Frequency
:5%
- Absolute voltage and frequency variations
: 2,5 %
4.4.4
Temperature rise
Temperature rise of transformers shall not exceed the following values when operating
continuously at the maximum kVA ratings, at the rated voltage and frequency and with the
provisions of clause 4.3 above:
4.4.5
Temperate
climate
Tropical
climate
50C
Oil immersed type:

Top oil temperature rise
measured by thermometer
Winding temperature rise
measured by resistance
60C
Dry type
Dependent on class of insulation
65C
55C
Impedance voltage and short circuit currents

Unless parallel operation with existing transformers, having different characteristics, is
specified, transformers shall have the following impedance voltage and short circuit
current values: Symmetrical short Circuit
kVA
% impedance volt.
in multiple of
duration in
at 75C
rated current
seconds
_______________________________________________________________________
__
50
631
2501
630 4.0 or 6.0

2500 6.0
3150 6.25
25
20
16
2
3
3
4.4.6
Vector group
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheets or accompanying documents, transformers
shall have winding connections in Dyn 5.
4.4.7
Noise level
The noise pressure level produced by transformers operating at the rated voltage and
frequency at either no load or full load shall be below 63 dB at 1 meter distance unless
specified otherwise on the data sheets.
4.4.8
Installation
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheets or accompanying documents oil immersed
transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation, while dry type transformers shall be
suitable for indoor installation.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 96
SPECIFICATIONS
4.5
4.5.1
Internal arrangement
Transformer core shall be of robust design adequately braced to prevent displacement
due to electromagnetic stresses of short circuits, and the mechanical shocks of normal
moving and handling of the transformer without any need for special shipping braces.
The core laminations shall be evenly secured to prevent settling of the core and minimise
noise and vibration when transformer is in operation.
The core construction shall be such that removal and replacement of the coils would
require the removal of minimum possible number of core laminations.
4.5.2
Tank or enclosure
For oil immersed transformers the tank, cover, radiators and any other attached
compartments, shall be rigid steel construction.
Radiator tubes or fins shall be so arranged that external cleaning and repainting can be
carried out at site without dismantling.
For sealed type transformers the tank cover shall be welded with continuous joint. Bolted
connection with tack-welded bolts is not acceptable. After filling the tank with oil the filling
orifice shall be permanently sealed in a tamperproof manner.
The tank cover, radiators etc. shall have adequate strength to withstand without
deformation the internal pressure of the oil, air and gas under operation conditions.
Pressure relief valves, when specified, shall be fitted and set to operate at static pressure
of less than the hydraulic test pressure of the tank.
4.5.3
Windings
Transformers shall have separate low and high voltage windings.
The neutral point of star connected windings shall be brought out separately to a terminal
on the respective winding side.
The MV winding shall have tapping at 2.5% and 5.0% of the rated MV voltage.
The winding coils shall be adequately braced to prevent distortion of the windings or
movement of the coils on the core limbs under short circuit condition or normal moving
and handling of the transformer.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 97
SPECIFICATIONS
4.5.4
Insulation
All windings shall be fully insulated and the insulation shall be free from any composites
likely to soften, shunt or collapse during service. The insulating material shall be of a type
that does not shrink, disintegrate, carbonise or become brittle in hot oil for immersed oil
transformer or under the general heat effect for dry type transformers.
Insulation varnish treatment shall be accomplished by vacuum impregnation.
Dry type transformers shall be free of partial discharge up to minimum 1.5 x nominal
voltage (< 10pc).
4.5.5
Oil and filling

Mineral oil for immersed type transformers shall be transformer oils complying IEC 60296.
Oil shall be dried prior to filling of the transformer which shall be performed under
vacuum.
PCB synthetic liquids (Poly Chlorinated Biphenyls) or other chlorinated hydro carbons
with trade names Askarel, Pyranol, Clapnen, Pyralene, etc. are not acceptable and shall
not be used.
Instructions for cleaning and filtering of the liquid used shall be furnished with each
transformer.
The dielectric strength of oil or synthetic liquid shall be more than 125 kV/cm.
Immersed type transformers shall be filled with oil or the specified synthetic liquid at the
manufacturers works, unless otherwise stated on the data sheets or accompanying
documents.
The brand and type of oil shall be stated on the rating plate.
4.5.6
Terminals
To provide a 4-wire system, the low voltage starpoint connections shall be brought out on
a separate terminal.
For immersed type transformers, the internal connections for terminals of MV side and of
LV side, if above 1000V, shall be below the cold oil level.
Terminals shall be marked in accordance with the connection diagram marked on the
rating plate.
The stems and bushing of the terminals shall be sealed in leak proof manner into the tank
wall or cover, rotations of terminal stems shall be prevented by effective locking.
External terminals for the connection of cables shall be provided with bolted type
conductor connections of adequate dimensions and ratings and if two or more conductors
per terminal are required, provision shall be made to accommodate the same.
All bushings shall be self-contained and shall be sealed into the enclosure air/gas and
liquid tight with non-deteriorating gaskets suitable for the liquid used.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 98
SPECIFICATIONS
For dry type transformers internal connections, including those for terminals, shall be
welded or brazed. Bolted or soldered connections are not acceptable in view of the rather
high conductor temperatures permitted at full load.
External terminal connections shall be of the bolted type and suitable for either cables or
open type busbar connections as specified.
All transformers shall be provided with external earthing terminal. This shall be either a
threaded bolt or bolted clamp. The minimum diameter shall be 8 mm.
4.5.7
Cable connection
4.5.7.1 Cable boxes

Cable entries into the boxes shall be located such that conductors can be clamped
straight into the terminal connectors without being bent into tortuous shapes inside the
box.
Extension pieces bolted to the actual terminal with additional bolted conductor clamps in
line with the cable entry may be required.
Cable boxes for oil filled cables shall be filled with cable filling compound or with cast
resin. Cable boxes for PVC or LPE cables shall be dry type single core type cables shall
be mounted in non-magnetic plates.
4.5.7.2 Terminations and glands
Cable terminations for lower voltages shall be with cable compression type glands. Single
core cable entries shall be mounted in non-magnetic plates.
For star point earthing an extra gland, suitable for PVC insulated cable shall be provided.
4.5.7.3 Supports and clamps
Cable clamp supports shall be delivered as an option.
4.5.7.4 Exposed bushing insulators
When transformers are connected to open busbar system, busbar trunking or overhead
lines, exposed bushing of proven design and of suitable insulating material shall be used
for the connections.
Both MV and LV bushing shall be self contained and in case of damage they should be
easy to replace.
Sealing of the bushing into the tank walls or cover shall be air, gas, and liquid tight with
non-deteriorating gaskets suitable for the liquid used.
MV insulators for overhead line connections shall be provided with suitable arcing horns.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 99
SPECIFICATIONS
4.5.8
Off-load tap changers

Tap changing on the MV winding tapping positions shall be done by externally hand
operated off-load tap changing switch. The switch shall preferably satisfy the following
requirements:
the switch shall be operable by its handle without the need of additional tool and
without risk to personnel safety;
the contact changing shall be positive snap action arranged so that it is impossible for
the contacts to be left in a position where the circuit remains interrupted;
the stops shall be robust type to prevent overrunning;
padlocking of the switch shall be provided;
tap positions shall be clearly marked;
the driving rod through the tank cover or wall shall be sealed to prevent leakage of
air, gas or liquid under all service conditions.
For dry type transformers tap changing can be effected by removable bolted type links.
4.5.9
Earthing
MV cable boxes shall have an earthing terminal of adequate dimensions for the cable
earthing wires. LV cables boxes shall have earthing terminals of adequate dimensions for
each cable earthing sheath wire.
For connection to the external earthing network, the enclosure shall have earthing pads
with threaded holes for connection to a 70 sq mm stranded copper earthing cable.
4.5.10 Fittings and accessories

The following shall be provided for all transformers:
dial type temperature indicator with adjustable warning and fixed alarm contacts;
lifting lugs for lifting the entire transformer;
hauling lugs for positioning the transformer;
skid under base with bi-directional rollers;
rating plate;
any special tools required for erection, operation, or maintenance of the transformer.
Further to the above the following shall be provided for hermetically sealed type
transformers:
a drain plug shall be provided at the lowest point of the conservator;
liquid sampling device, separately fitted or combined with the drain valve;
a pressure relays with two contacts;
two thermometer pockets with sealing cap. Pockets shall be approximately 150 mm
deep and 20 mm inside diameter and welded into the tank wall such that a
thermometer or thermo-probe can be inserted to measure the top liquid temperature
even at the lowest liquid level;
filling cap for topping of liquid.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 100
SPECIFICATIONS
Further to the above the following shall be provided for breather type transformers:
Air dryer with silica-gel dehydration capsule and suitable air lock;
Liquid conservator (if specified on the data sheets) with connection pipe to
transformer tank and extending into the conservator for collection of any water or
sludge. A drain plug shall be provided at the lowest part of the conservator;
Liquid level indicator fitted on the conservator, if conservator is provided, otherwise it
shall be fitted on the tank wall;
Gas and liquid activated Buchholz relay (if specified on the data sheets) with suitable
valves and flanges to enable removal for maintenance without dismantling the
transformer;
Oil filter valves, one at high level and the other at low level. Valves shall be of
adequate capacity and shall be provided with sealing plugs or caps;
Lifting lugs for lifting tank cover with core and coil assembly. If without further lifting
lugs for core and coil assembly shall be provided.
4.5.11 Rating plate
The rating plate(s) shall be of non-corrosive material. Enamelled plates are not
acceptable. The rating plate(s) shall give the following information:
the international specification to which the transformer conforms to;
vector group and winding connection;
percentage tapping positions of rated MV voltage;
rated MV voltage at zero tapping;
rated LV voltages at no load and full load at above condition;
rated ambient temperature;
rated kVA at self air cooling and fan forced air cooling at above conditions;
rated full load current and short circuit current withstand for 3 seconds;
rated reactance;
make, type, volume, and weight of insulation liquid;
enclosure class of transformer;
lifting weight of the core and winding assembly;
lifting weight of the entire transformer with liquid;
transformer type, make, serial number, year of manufacture and purchase order
number.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 101
SPECIFICATIONS
4.6
Inspection and testing
4.6.1 Inspection
Visual inspection of the transformer or its parts and accessories may be required by the
engineer or inspector representing the principal at the following stages of construction:
Before core and winding assembly is placed in the transformer tank.

Before final packing of the transformer and its parts for shipment.
The requirement for such inspection shall be indicated in the data sheets or accompanying
documents and the manufacturer has to inform the principal and/or the engineer
representing the principal, two weeks in advance of the events' dates.
4.6.2 Testing
The manufacturers shall test the transformers to the requirements of the specified
international standards. The engineer or inspector representing the principal may witness
some or all of the tests. The witnessed tests shall be indicated on the data sheets or
accompanying documents and the manufacturers have to inform the principal and/or the
engineer representing the principal, two weeks in advance of the test dates.
4.6.2.1 Routine tests
All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests:
measurement of winding resistance;
measurement of voltage ratio and check of voltage vector relationship;
measurement of impedance voltage (at zero tapping), short-circuit impedance and
load loss;
measurement of no-load loss and current;
induced overvoltage withstand;
separate source voltage withstand;
the insulation resistance of each winding in turn to all other windings, core and frame
or tank connected to earth shall be measured and recorded. The coil and winding
temperatures shall be measured immediately prior to the test and be recorded.
4.6.2.2 Type tests
The manufacturer shall carry out the following type tests if requested on the data sheets
or accompanying documents, if not, evidence of such type tests carried out on similar
transformers will be accepted:
temperature rise test;
impulse voltage withstand test (on oil immersed type transformers).

08 March 2012
P a g e | 102
SPECIFICATIONS
4.6.2.3 Special tests
Any one or more of the following tests may be requested of the manufacturer to be
carried out on the transformer, if specifically requested on the data sheets or
accompanying documents:
measurement of zero sequence impedance;
short-circuit test capabilities of transformer;
measurement of the harmonics on the no-load current;
measurement of power taken by the fan and oil pump motors;
measurement of acoustic sound level.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 103
SPECIFICATIONS
4.7
Packing and shipment

If packing is specified on the data sheets or accompanying documents, then transformers
shall be packed in wooden type seaworthy crates having sufficient strength to withstand
normal ship handling and transport.
The crates shall be marked with the place of destination, the principal's name, order
number, type of equipment etc.
Enclosed with the transformer the following documents shall be included in suitable
wrapping:
Electrical wiring diagram;
General arrangement drawing;
Erection instructions;
Operation and maintenance manual.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 104
SPECIFICATIONS
4.8
Document requirements
In addition to the required basic drawings, the following documents shall be submitted for
approval:
Drawings of rating plate, showing all data specified on this plate;
Schematic diagrams, showing winding connection diagram, main and auxiliary terminal
identification and all schematic information required for external interconnections;
Completed data sheets;
List of priced spare parts recommended being on hand during plant start-up and in the
first two years of operations;
Test certificates.
DIESEL GENERATOR SET
5.1 Scope
5.1.1 General
This specification covers the general requirements for design, engineering, delivery,
installation, commissioning and testing of a low-voltage Emergency Diesel Generator set
suitable for generation of low voltage electrical power including all auxiliary apparatus (like
fuel system, ventilation system, exhausters), alarm and protection systems.
Mostly the generator will be a four pole electrical machine running at a speed of 1500 rpm
(50 Hz) or 1800 rpm (60 Hz). There is no intention to give the full details of design and
construction of the EDG-set, this specification sets the minimum acceptable requirements
for design, rating, construction, testing, transportation and packing.
All erection work such as erection of EDG-set, mounting of all accessories, mounting of all
piping and ducts, erection of the control panel, mounting of all cable between the engine
and generator and control panel including all mounting facilities form part of the scope
work.
5.1.2 Equipment covered
Supplier shall engineer, design, construct, fabricate, document, test, transport to site,
install and commission an EDG-set, in accordance with this specification and drawing(s),
consisting of, but not limed to:
Diesel engine and generator connected with a flexible coupling and mounted on a common
base frame with integrated vibration damping pads;
self-excited generator with rotating rectifiers and voltage regulator (AVR);
all interconnecting cabling between the items in the scope of supply;
cooling system;
fuel system, fuel tank and piping;
lubrication System;
starting system based on stored energy including a means to charge the energy storage
medium preferably electrical battery;
combustion air system and Exhaust piping and stack;
complete instrumentation, interlocks and control for start-up, monitoring and safe
operation;
complete electrical equipment and accessories consisting of a common base frame
mounted or floor standing local control panel (the generator circuit breaker is not included
in the scope of supply);
all on-skid / frame mounted cabling;
08 March 2012
P a g e | 105
SPECIFICATIONS
5.1.3
star point resistor or transformer, where applicable;

foundation bolts, nuts, levelling plates and shims, etc., for all equipment as well as
platforms, walkways and stairs, handrails, etc., as necessary for safe operation of the
EDG;
all equipment necessary for protection the whole installation to arching faults and lightning.
maintenance and erection tools and tackle for all supplied equipment;
documentation such as technical information, as built documentation, operation, erection
and maintenance manuals, spare part list;
other devices required to complete a stand alone functional equipment;
electrical batteries shall be delivered at time of installation.
Specific requirements
The specific requirements and details of the EDG-set required are given on the
drawing(s) and / or accompanying document(s). In case of conflicting requirements
between this general specification and the specific requirements, the drawing(s) shall
always rule.
If there are, in the opinion of the supplier any conflicts between the standards and this
specification, these contradictions shall be brought to the attention of the buyer. The order
of priority governing this contract shall be the following:
standards & Codes;
drawing(s);
specification for Emergency Diesel Generator set.
5.1.4
Maintenance contract
The Supplier shall quote separately for a maintenance contract to last for a number of
years as requested by the Buyer.
The maintenance shall consist of (as a minimum):
regular site visits for preventive maintenance, visual inspections, leakage checks,
filter replacements, etc.;
visits and works for corrective maintenance, whenever needed

08 March 2012
P a g e | 106
SPECIFICATIONS
5.2 Applicable Standards

5.2.1 International standards
Unless specified otherwise the Emergency Diesel Generator set shall conform in design,
material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the IEC (International
Electrical Commission) and ISO (International Organization for Standardization) standards
and in particular to the following publications:
Electrical standards:
IEC 60034
IEC 60050
IEC 60079
IEC 60085
IEC 60038
IEC 60051
IEC 60059
IEC 60044
IEC 60269
IEC 60298
IEC 60439
IEC 60446
IEC 60529
IEC 60617
IEC 60688
IEC 60721
IEC 60947
IEC 62052
IEC 61547
IEC 61557

Rotating electrical machines

International Electro technical Vocabulary
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres
Terminal evaluation and classification of
electrical insulation
IEC Standard voltage
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring
instruments
and
their
accessories
IEC Standard current ratings
Instruments transformers
Low voltage fuses
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control
gear for rated voltage above 1 kV and up to
and including 52 kV
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
assemblies
Basic and safety principles for manmachine
interface,
marking
and
identification
Degrees of protection provided by
enclosures
Graphical symbols for diagrams
Electrical measuring transducers for
converting AC electrical quantities to
analogue or digital signals
Classification of environmental conditions
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
Electricity metering equipment (AC)
General requirements, tests, and test
conditions (Classes 0.5, 1 and 2)
Equipment for general lighting purposes
EMC immunity requirements
Electrical safety in low voltage distribution
systems up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC
08 March 2012
P a g e | 107
SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel Engine standards:
5.2.2
ISO 8528
ISO 1680
ISO 3046
Reciprocating internal combustion engine

driven alternating current generating sets.
Acoustic Test code for the measurement
of airborne noise emitted by rotating
electrical machines
Reciprocating internal combustion engines
Local standards
Further to the international standards the EDG-set shall in any case comply with the local
standards and / or regulations of the country where it will be installed, when these are
higher, more stringent or of special nature.
The manufacturer shall determine by careful scrutiny which of the requirements will be
acceptable as regards safety, economic and legal aspects.
In all cases the manufacturer shall inform the principal of any deviation for the
requirements of this specification, which is considered necessary in order to comply with
national and local regulations.
5.2.3
CE-directive
The diesel engine, generator and all components, equipment, panels, panel compositions
and systems to be supplied by Supplier will meet the applicable CE-directives and will be
equipped with the CE-certificate. Any exceptions to the proceeding shall be clearly stated
in the quotation by Supplier.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 108
SPECIFICATIONS
5.3
5.3.1
Local conditions
The Emergency Diesel Generator set with all required equipment forming part of the EDGset shall be suitable for use indoors or outdoors in a container as specified in the
requisition.
Tropical climates
Tropical climates when specified shall be of the following nature:
Ambient temperatures:
Max. 50 C
Min. 0 C
daily average 35 C
Relative humidity:
Max. 90%
Outdoor conditions:
Varying from sunny to rain with
sandstorms.
thunderstorms or
5.3.2
Altitude
Normally the EDG-set will not be installed at an altitude higher than 1000 metres above
sea level.
5.3.3
Environmental conditions EDG-set

The EDG-set shall be suitable for indoor in a defined room, in a building or outdoor in a
container as specified on the drawings(s). The area where the EDG-set is being installed
is classified as a Non Hazardous Area. In case the EDG-set is being installed INDOOR in
a defined room, the conditions shall be as specified on the drawing(s). In case the EDGset is being installed OUTDOOR in a container, delivery and installation of the containers
shall be part of the supply.
5.4
5.4.1
Design Considerations
General
The Emergency Diesel Generator set shall be placed in a closed container or in a defined
room in a building. The diesel engine and generator shall be both placed on a common
base metal frame with integrated vibration damping pads and form a completely set
together. The two shafts shall be coupled by a flexible coupling.
The diesel engine shall be of the medium speed, heavy duty, four (4) stoke and water
cooled type. In general the speed of the diesel engine shall not exceed 1500 rotations per
minute (rpm) (50 Hz) or 1800 rpm (60 Hz).
The generator shall be of a three-phase self-regulated brushless type. The star-point of
the generator shall be earth reliably as well the generator operated in island- or parallel
running.
The control panel shall be of a standard, well tested and proven design which ensures
maximum safety to personnel, maximum service reliability and economic operation for an
operational lifetime to be agreed with the Buyer. Design and construction shall be simple
and well laid-out and shall provide good accessibility to components and parts.
Even under extreme conditions of major short circuit or normal operation there shall be no
danger to persons in the vicinity of the assembly.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 109
SPECIFICATIONS
5.4.2
System variations
Generators shall be capable of delivering their full power ratings within their limits of
temperature rise, with a continuous output voltage deviation of up to and including 5% of
the rated system voltage and 2% of the individual harmonics.
The EDG-set shall endure 10% overload for 2 hours a day.
The transient voltage rise at the generator terminals when the nominal load is cut out
shall not exceed 30%.
5.4.3
Operation
Upon a mains failure the EDG-set shall start and take over the supply to the emergency
switchboard automatically within 15 seconds from standstill unless specified otherwise.
It shall be possible to switch over from one operation mode to any other mode without
generating a tripping command, except for switching to the off mode.
After the generator is switched-off the EDG-set shall be stopped automatically after three
minutes unless it must be stopped immediately. The manufacturer shall clearly state in
which cases the EDG-set has to be stopped immediately.
5.4.4
Flexible coupling
The flexible coupling between the diesel engine and generator shaft shall improve a
regular non fluctuating speed of the alternator. The coupling decreases the axial forces in
the shafts of both the diesel engine and the generator.
5.4.5
Noise level
The level of noise produced by the EDG-set operation on the rated voltage and frequency
at either no load or full load shall meet the specifications of IEC 60034.
If the EDG-set is required for operation in urban surroundings a lower noise level may be
imposed and shall be indicated as the following limits:
level at 1 meter from EDG-set (inside container or technical building) :
110 dB(A);
level at 1 meter from container or technical room/building measured;
at wall of engine room (outside)
:
75
dB(A)
level at 1 meter from exhaust
:
75
dB(A)
Where excessive noise from equipment cannot be eliminated by low noise design,
acoustic measures like sound absorbing hoods or cladding may be needed. The
construction, the materials used and the life expectancy shall be agreed with the Buyer.
The measuring equipment to determine the noise level shall be qualified as published in
IEC 60651.
5.4.6
Vibration
The design shall allow for a low vibration radiation level from the diesel engine to the
building the EDG-set is located in. This shall be achieved by avoiding, or fast passing of,
critical speeds and the usage of damping pads.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 110
SPECIFICATIONS
The supplier shall show though calculations in advance or measurements on location that
the vibrations level is acceptable for the applicable technical building.
Where special measures with regard to civil works are to be taken the supplier shall
mention such measures in his bid.
5.4.7
Direction of rotation
The relation between the direction of rotating and terminal markings shall be as specified
in IEC 60034-8.
The direction of rotation for which the EDG-set is arranged shall be clearly indicated on
the non-driven end by means of an arrow. A painted arrow is not sufficient.
5.4.8
Parallel operation
The EDG-set shall be suitable for parallel operation with another EDG-set or with the
mains. The diesel engine as well the generator shall be provided with a mechanical
and/or electrical governor and regulator.
5.4.8.1 Diesel engine

The governor or regulator shall be suitable for the intended use of the EDG (Running in
parallel or stand alone). The diesel engine shall be operated with a constant speed and
frequency. The diesel engine shall be suitable for a cold start and directly delivering of a
percentage of nominal power as specified on the drawing(s).
5.4.8.2 Generator
The generator shall be provided with a constant voltage regulator. For parallel operation
with the main field an automatic synchronising unit shall be part of the control panel.
The power factor from the generator shall be adjustable between the 0,9 inductive and
0,9 capacitive.
The generator shall be provided with a demagnetising facility in the rotor circuit in case
the main voltage in one or more phases falls off until 70% of the nominal range. In case a
calculation proved that a faster demagnetising is needed, this shall be determinative.
The generator shall be suitable to operate continuously on an unearthed system and for
periods on an unearthed system with an earth fault and suitable operation:
in isolated operation;
parallel with other generators;
parallel with the public grid.
5.5
5.5.1
Diesel Engine
General
The diesel engine shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated speed for 24 hour
duty per day, incorporating an overload factor.
Immediately after the start the diesel engine shall be able to provide an agreed
percentage of the nominal power.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 111
SPECIFICATIONS
5.5.2
Cooling system
The cooling system of the diesel engine shall be a water-cooled closed circuit. The watercooled circuit consist of a circulation pump, radiator, cooling fan(s), thermostat and a
warming-up bypass system.
The cooling water shall contain anticorrosion and antifreeze additive.
The cooling fan(s) shall be driven mechanically, unless mentioned otherwise on the data
sheets. Electrically driven fan(s) shall preferably be executed redundant.
5.5.2.1 Exhaust cooling air inlet/outlet.

The exhaust system shall consist of an exhaust silencer with flexible connection to
exhaust manifold, compensating pipe, flame trap, if required, and rigid exhaust piping to
outdoor.
Openings in the building necessary for cooling air in- and outlets etc. shall be providing
with rain louvers combined with a grid to bar out animals as mouses, rats and birds; the
louvers and grid form part of the supply. The louvers and grid shall be corrosion resistant.
All wall feed-through ducts for air in- and outlets and exhaust outlet form part of the
supply. The ducts shall be corrosion resistant.
5.5.3
Lubrication system
The lubrication system of the diesel engine shall be a closed circuit mostly provided with a
mechanical driven gear oil-pump. The lube oil will flow from the lube oil reservoir (carter),
through coolers in the radiator and through the oil filters to the lubrication places (main
bearings, camshaft bearings, governor, etc.) and back to the lube oil reservoir.
The oil cooler shall be of sufficient capacity to keep the oil temperature within acceptable
values at full engine capacity at maximum ambient temperature as determine on the data
sheet(s).
A thermostatic controlled valve shall be used as bypass, to keep the oil at the fixed value.
The pressure of the lubrication oil system shall be higher than the pressure of the water in
the cooling system, to avoid contamination of the oil system by water.
Oil filters and oil coolers shall be supplied with a bypass, equipped with the safety valve to
relief an overpressure if congestion in the filter of the cooler occurs, not endangering and
personnel if triggered.
A hand pump for draining the lube oil out of the lubrication system shall be provided
unless indicated otherwise on the datasheet. The hand pump shall be supplied complete
with valve and hose connection.
All necessary accessories like pressure gauge, temperature and oil level indicators,
pressure relief valves, bypass valves, and pressure switches for alarm and control shall
be furnished by the supplier together with all connecting piping, fittings, supports, etc.
5.5.4
Engine starter system

The starter system shall be suitable to start the engine with the mechanically coupled
generator.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 112
SPECIFICATIONS
The engine shall normally be started by a 24 V DC starter motor with a lead-acid battery.
Another starting system if required shall be indicated on the drawing(s).
It shall be possible to operate the starter system either manually with a push button or by
an automatically start command. If in the automatic mode the first attempt to start fails,
two more attempts shall be made automatically.
If the motor fails to start after the first start cycle the batteries shall allow 6 more
consecutive starts at the minimum ambient temperature. The manufacturer shall provide
all accessories necessary for starting, automatic control and safe operation of the EDGset.
5.5.4.1 Pre-heating system
The EDG-set shall be equipped with pre-heating of the cooling and / or lubricating system
for quick starting at any ambient temperature. The vendor shall specify on the data
sheet(s) and guarantee the maximum time it takes for the EDG-set to deliver the full load
from starting under any condition.
The heating systems shall be separately equipped with an operating switch in the main
circuit and if specified padlocking facilities. The heating system shall be supplied from the
control panel.
5.5.4.2 Start Batteries
The Supplier shall deliver the EDG-set complete with an automatic controlled charging
device. The battery shall be mounted near the starter motor in a sheet steel cubicle or
wooden box. The sheet steel cubicle shall be coated with several layers of anti-sulphuric
or ant-alkaline enamel. A wooden box shall be of impregnated wood. The battery box
shall be placed free of the floor and easy accessible for maintenance operations.
5.5.5
Engine Governor / Control

The diesel engine shall have a engine governor with motorized speed control. The
governor shall be suitable for maintaining an accuracy of class A1 as mentioned in the
standard ISO-3046.
5.5.6
Fuel tank
Unless otherwise specified a storage fuel-tank shall be part of the delivery.
The storage fuel-tank shall in any case comply with the standards. The standard be in
forced in case the tank will be placed in the ground or above of it.
A day fuel-tank shall be part of the delivery. The day fuel-tank shall have a capacity
sufficient for continuous operation of the EDG-set for at least the time that is specified on
the Vendor data sheet(s).
The day tank could be placed separately or integrated with the EDG-set. If the EDG-set is
placed indoor the tank shall be provide with a leakage tray perform double-wall. If
specified, a leakage indicator shall be part of the delivery.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 113
SPECIFICATIONS
With the day tank a level gauge, wall or floor mounting brackets, fuel and drain tap, fuel
piping to the engine and the filling system with electrical pump, emergency hand-pump of
stainless steel or protected carbon steel shall be included.
5.6
5.6.1
Generator
General
The neutral point of the generator shall be made in the neutral terminal box and shall
have a connection for the grounding cable. If specified, the current transformers at the
neutral point for measurement and protection shall also be installed in the neutral terminal
box. If specified, a separate earth electrode connected to the star-point of the generator
can be requested.
The generator shall be equipped with a complete excitation system capable of supplying
excitation current to the generator under all output conditions (from no load to full load
and overload) and capable of maintaining constant generator voltage within the tolerance
specified.
The excitation power shall be supplied to the rotor via rotating rectifiers and shall be able
to be disconnected in case of generator protection trip.
All parts of the generator shall be capable of withstanding the electrical, mechanical,
thermal and other stresses experienced during normal operation and under upset
operation conditions such as short circuits and over speeding.
5.6.2
Standard ratings
Generators power (kVA) and voltage rating shall comply with the preferred values of the
standards specified. Unless otherwise specifically stated, power ratings shall be based on
the values of temperature and humidity specified.
Manufacturer shall submit with the tender requisition a capability diagram showing the
generator apparent power as function of the coolant temperature, based on the method of
cooling applied and the maximum allowable (total) temperature for insulation materials
used.
The rated power output shall be for continuous operation with rated power factor of 0.8
lagging (type of duty S1).
5.6.3 Temperature rise

5.6.3.1 Generator
Temperature rise of generators, including exciter, shall not exceed the values mentioned
in IEC 60034-1 when operating at the full power ratings on systems of the rated voltage
and with the provisions of clause 4.2.
The temperature rise inside the control panel shall not exceed temperatures indicated in
publication IEC-60947.
5.6.3.2 Windings
The temperature of the windings shall be maximum 120 C absolute, at a maximum
ambient temperature of 40 C.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 114
SPECIFICATIONS
5.6.4
Insulation and Windings

The generator stator, rotor and exciter windings shall be manufactured in accordance with
isolation class F.
The generator shall be able to withstand an over-voltage wave of 1.2/50 micro-seconds
with a peak-value of 4 times the nominal voltage.
5.6.5
Degree of protection
Housings and bearings shall be protected against ingress of dust and liquid. The degree
of protection shall be IP23 or higher. If the EDG-set will be placed outside the degree of
protection of junction boxes shall be at least IP54.
5.6.6
Short circuit currents

The generator shall withstand without deterioration a short circuit on the generator
terminals with the voltage regulation in operation of at least 5 seconds.
The steady-state short-circuit current of the generator shall be at least 3 times the rated
current.
5.6.6.1 Generator reactances
The transient reactance Xd of the generator shall be maximum 20%. The sub-transient
reactance Xd shall be maximum 12.5%. If required otherwise the vendor shall specified
this.
5.6.7
Wave-form
In addition to the requirements in IEC 60034 for the wave-form the distortion at rated
voltage shall be less than 5% for the line to neutral voltage and 3% for the line tot line
voltage.
The distortion is defined as the arithmetical sum of the harmonies exceeding 0.5% of the
basic frequency wave.
5.6.8
Critical speed (voltage control)

The generator shell be self excited and have an electronic voltage regulator (AVR)
integrated in the excitation unit.
Generators with a rigid, sub-critical rotor bearing system shall have the first critical speed
not lower than 125% of the rated generator speed.
Generators with a flexible, over-critical rotor bearing system shall have the first critical
speed below 80% of the rated generator speed and the second critical speed shall be not
lower than 125% of the rated generator speed.
5.6.9
Ventilation
In case the generator is placed in a dusty environment it shall be performed with dustfilters in front of the ventilation-holes.
The fan of a force air-cooled-generator shall be corrosion-resistant. Mating faces (such as
end-shields/frame, cable-box/frame, cover/cable-box etc.) shall be treated to prevent
corrosion.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 115
SPECIFICATIONS
5.6.10 Space heaters
Space heaters shall only be provided if they are required because of the manufacturers
design or the owners wishes.
Voltage: 220V, 1 phase or 380V, 3 phases 50 Hz
The space-heater leads shall be brought out to a separate terminal box.
5.6.11 Drain holes
Drain holes shall be provided at all locations in the enclosure where water might collect.
5.6.12 Cable boxes
The generator shall be provided with terminal boxes and cable glands suited to the cables
or bus ducts specified.
The generator shall have two earth terminals, one inside the main cable box, and one
outside on the frame.
The six stator winding ends shall be brought out on insulators to one terminal box, such a
way that the cores of the cable can be connected with a crimped lug to the termination pin
or though-going pin of the insulator.
The generator shall be provided with a main terminal assembly arranged in such a way
that the pot-head with the sealed cable can be withdrawn to facilitate the removal of the
generator in gas of overhaul.
All other cable boxes shall have an earth terminal inside the cable box.
In all cases, the necessary accessories for mounting and termination of the cables shall
be delivered together with the generator. The cables may not pass though the foundation.
If single core cables are used, the gland-plate and glands or cable pothead shall be made
of non-magnetic materials.
5.6.13 Rotor and Vibrations
The rotor and fan shall be dynamically balanced with half key and after that with the half
coupling mounted on the shaft. The vibrations level shall be good as given in the
international standard ISO 3945.
5.6.14 Bearings
The bearing houses shall be electrically insulated to prevent shaft currents.
The generator shall not cause any axial effort to the driving equipment.
The generator shall be equipped with bearings on the driven side and the non driven side.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 116
SPECIFICATIONS
5.7
5.7.1
Control
General
The EDG-set shall be equipped with all necessary systems for the control and safety as
to guarantee an efficient and reliable operation under all working conditions.
The electrical system for the control panel of the EDG-set shall be 3 phase and neutral, 4wire solidly earthed. Unless otherwise specified the neutral conductor size shall not be
less than half size of the phase conductors.
5.7.2
Housing / enclosure Control Panel

The control panel shall be of the floor mounting cubicle type, shall have a complete metal
enclosure of sufficient mechanical strength.
The materials of construction shall be properly prepared and treated against rust or
corrosion. The panel shall be self-supporting and suitable for front entry and operation.
In case of cable cellar, adequate bottom plates shall be provided which at least prevent
access by rodents.
The degree of protection shall be as specified on the data sheets and in accordance with
publication IEC-60529 and shall be a minimum protection as follows:
indoor with closed doors:
IP4X
outdoor under shed:
IP55
outdoor unprotected:
IP65
All components requiring periodical maintenance shall be easily accessible.
5.7.3
Anti-condensation precautions
Effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the formation of harmful condensation
inside the enclosure, under both operating or non-operating conditions and service
conditions.
If required 220 V AC - 1 phase space heaters shall be provided.
The space heaters shall be controlled by a thermostatic switch and shall be wired to
outgoing terminals.
5.7.4
Arcing faults
Measures shall be taken to prevent the occurrence of internal arcing faults.
The design and construction of the control panel shall furthermore be such as to provide
the highest possible degree of personnel protection in case of an internal arcing fault
against radiation, overpressure and hot gases.
5.7.5
Parts of the Control Panel

All equipment for measuring and control shall, if needed for operation of the EDG, be
connected to an UPS system, included in the scope of supply.
5.7.5.1 Equipment in the panel

The following equipment shall be mounted in the panel:
automatic control equipment for selection of fully automatic or manually controlled
operation with remote control capability, including auxiliary electric circuits;
automatic synchronization equipment and synchro check relay;
generator protection relays;
08 March 2012
P a g e | 117
SPECIFICATIONS
automatic monitoring system with visual and audible alarms and engine safety
shutdown;
synchronoscope;
1 double voltmeter;
1 double frequency meter;
1 ammeter with selector switch;
1 kWh counter;
1 voltmeter with selector switch;
1 active power meter;
1 power factor meter;
position indicator for generator circuit breaker;
position indicator for star point earthing switch.
5.7.5.2 Indicators in the panel

The following indications shall be provided in the panel or locally at the equipment:
work hour counter;
start counter;
fuel tank level;
current;
voltage;
active power;
power factor.
5.7.5.3 Signals to the control panel / room
The following electrical signals shall provided in the panel and carried out to the LCDdisplay of the control panel or the Control Room via data-bus if available, else via dry
contacts.
control battery voltage low
alarm;
start battery voltage low
alarm;
synchronization failure after 3 attempts
shutdown;
mini circuit breaker group tripped
alarm;
EDG-set control failure
alarm;
EDG-set unavailable for start
alarm;
EDG-set running
alarm;
EDG-set in test mode
alarm;
battery charger failure
alarm;
star point earthing switch
status.
5.7.6
Diesel Engine Monitoring

All individual alarms and trips and the status of the starting energy storage as well as
three group alarms EDG Electrical Fault, EDG Mechanical Fault and EDG shutdown
shall be carried out to the EDG Control Panel and shall be indicated on the LCD-display.
As a minimum the following alarm and trip signals shall be furnished, in case of shutdown
restart shall only be possible after fault(s) are corrected and manual resetting at the
Control Panel is complete:
oil pressure low
alarm;
oil pressure low
shutdown;
cooling water temperature high
alarm;

08 March 2012
P a g e | 118
SPECIFICATIONS
cooling water temperature high high

shutdown;
cooling water level low
alarm;
fuel oil tank level low
alarm;
overspeed
alarm;
overspeed
shutdown;
start failure after first three unsuccessful start attempts
alarm;
start failure after second three unsuccessful start attempts
shutdown;
emergency stop
shutdown.
Each signal will be named with its process-related identification code which shall be
incorporated in EDG-set documentation.
5.7.7
Generator Protection
As a minimum the following alarm and trip signals shall be furnished, in case of shutdown
restart shall only be possible after fault(s) are corrected and manual resetting is complete:
overcurrent protection
shutdown;
overload protection
shutdown;
differential protection
shutdown;
under- / overvoltage protection
shutdown;
under- / overfrequency protection
shutdown;
reverse power protection
shutdown.
All alarms and trip signals shall be indicated on the LCD-display of the control panel.
If the furnished electrical protection relays are of the digital multifunctional type then also
all other available protection features shall be wired up at applicable circuits.
Each signal will be named with its process-related identification code which shall be
incorporated in EDG-set documentation.
5.7.7.1 UPS-system
For supply of the above mentioned apparatus and circuits an UPS (preferably 24 VDC)
shall be included. If another UPS-system is required it shall be indicated on the
drawing(s). The UPS-system shall have a minimum back-up time as specified on the
drawing(s). The UPS-system shall take care of the operation- and control-circuits in case
the main voltage shall be damaged.
The 24 V DC UPS-system shall be provided as per the requirements described in
Standard Specification for Uninterrupted Power Supply System.
5.7.8
Wiring / cabling
Control wiring shall be minimum 1.5 mm, stranded, 750 V AC grade. All power
wiring/cabling shall be minimum 2.5 mm, stranded, and 1000 V AC grade. All cables
shall be designed and chosen in accordance with publication IEC-60446.
Wiring to door mounted devices shall be suitable for hinge wire application.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 119
SPECIFICATIONS
Bundles of single-core cables shall be routed neatly in the vertical and/or horizontal plane.
Individual wires and bundles shall be secured with plastic wire ties, cable lacing or by
enclosing in plastic wiring trays.
Compartments shall be completely internally wired. Outgoing wiring shall be terminated at
a terminal block interface, via plug and socket connectors between withdraw able and
fixed part of compartment. The terminal block interface shall be mounted opposite each
respective breaker/contactor compartment, in the cable compartment.
All terminal blocks shall be rated 20 A (minimum) at 500 V. All terminal blocks shall have
a white plastic marking strip over the length of the block.
5.8
5.8.1
General
The diesel engine and generator shall be placed and installed on a common metal frame.
Under the diesel engine and day fuel-tank shall be a leak tray placed.
5.8.2
Pipework
The piping shall be routed to provide minimal joint, adequate provision for thermal
expansion shall be considered.
Overhead pipes including insulation shall have a minimum clearance of 2,0 meter.
Overhead pipes above electrical panels are not allowed.
All drain and vent valves have to be located in easily accessible positions.
5.8.3
Mounting
Transport units heavier than 25 kg shall have eye bolts, lugs or extension pieces clearly
identifiable to be used for hoisting.
Eye bolts shall not be part of the equipment degree of protection.
The diesel drive and generator shall have jacking bolts or facilities to lift the equipment
with the aid of a mechanical jacking device to facilitate alignment of the generator with the
diesel engine.
5.8.4
Corrosion protection
Surface preparation and painting of the EDG-set assembly and auxiliaries and enclosures
must be suitable for the environmental conditions to which the equipment is subject of
and be suitable for the equipment design life.
No significant corrosion on any painted surface may occur during the initial operating
period of 30 years, provided that the paint job remains mechanically undamaged.
Colour of final coating shall be manufacturers standard if not specifically stated otherwise
in the data sheet(s).
5.8.5
Nameplates and tagging

Nameplates for electrical cabinets/panels/junction boxes shall be according to the
requirements defined on the drawing(s).

08 March 2012
P a g e | 120
SPECIFICATIONS
The generator shall have an engraved stainless steel nameplate. The displayed
information shall comply with relevant IEC standard.
This includes as a minimum:
kind of generator;
applicable standards;
manufacturers name;
serial number;
year of manufacture;
number of phases;
rated power;
rated frequency;
rated voltages;
rated currents;
rated power factor;
connection symbol;
type of cooling;
total weight.
Additional information, either on the same or on an additional nameplate, is required as
follows:
graphic representation of winding connections and terminal designations;
design ambient temperature, if other than standard;
no load and load losses.
kind of engine;
applicable standards;
manufacturers name;
serial number;
year of manufacture;
rated rpm;
total weight.
A nameplate for the assembly shall be provided. The displayed information includes as a
minimum:
purchase order and/or project identification;
TAG;
CE marking.
All gauges, instruments, valves, filters, filling points and other items used during
maintenance and operation and all cables shall be properly tagged as well.
5.9
Inspection and Testing

The supplier shall submit a verification and validation plan addressing all analysis,
simulation, inspection, testing, erection and commissioning activities to be carried out from

08 March 2012
P a g e | 121
SPECIFICATIONS
the start of the contract in order to fully show compliance with all requirements in this
specification and referenced documentation.
Each EDG-set and its auxiliaries are subject to inspection during their manufacture.
Buyers staff shall have unrestricted access to manufacturers facilities during normal
working hours while this contract is active.
Manufacturing test procedures shall be sent to the buyer prior to test activities.
Authorised representatives of buyer shall be informed, upon request, about work progress
and shall receive all pertinent documentation about test procedures and results.
The supplier will inform the buyer on date and schedule of witness and routine tests 10
working days prior to the test.
Routine testing of each EDG-set shall be according to applicable IEC/ISO-standards and
will be witnessed by buyers staff.
Sub assembly parts, for example the generator, battery chargers and the diesel engine,
shall be tested by their manufacturers in accordance with the manufacturers and IEC/ISO
standards. Buyer will have the possibility to witness these tests and test reports shall be
made available to Buyer.
The assembly shall be tested/inspected before dispatch at the manufacturers facilities as
far as possible and in accordance with the manufacturers standards. As a minimum proper
starting of the EDG-set, proper alignment, and balancing and vibration free running shall be
shown.
After installation the complete assembly and every subpart thereof shall be tested on site.
Testing shall be done in accordance ISO 8528-6 for the assembly and in accordance with
the sub-suppliers test procedure for assembly parts.
Test reports of these tests shall be made available to buyer at no extra cost.
All defects detected as a result of testing shall be repaired by manufacturer and failed tests
shall be repeated. All results of such repairs and repeat tests shall be documented and
must be made available to buyer.
5.10 Data Requirements
Enclosed with the EDG-set the following documents shall be included in suitable wrapping:
certified dimensional drawings, including complete type numbers, generator power
diagrams, footprint drawings, main electrical data, weights, dimensions and location of
all major parts and cable connection details;
installation, operating and maintenance manuals covering all aspects of these
headings for proper and safe procedures;
spare parts schedules with all information required to positively identify all replaceable
parts and with all required re-ordering information.
All operation and maintenance instructions, name and rating plates, identification labels
instructions and notices to the public and staff and all other written and printed matter
08 March 2012
P a g e | 122
SPECIFICATIONS
required for operation and maintenance shall be in the Vietnamese language unless the
document is about (maintenance) work to be done by Supplier personnel, then the English
language suffices. All documents for daily usage shall be in Vietnamese language.
5.11 Packing and Shipment
If packing is specified on the Vendor data sheet(s) or accompanying documents, the Diesel
Engine, Generator and Control Panel shall be packed to withstand normal shipping and
transport. If needed the equipment shall be packed in wooden seaworthy crates having
sufficient strength.
Each package shall be marked with the place of destination, the principals name, order
number, type of equipment, weight, hoisting points, etc.
Enclosed with the board, the following documents shall be included in suitable wrapping:
electrical and mechanical schematic diagram;
electrical wiring diagram;
piping diagram;
general arrangement drawing;
foundation plan including foundation loadings;
operation and maintenance manual.
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

Main distribution and sub-main distribution Board
General
The Main panel boards in the electrical rooms shall be floor standing type constructed to
BS EN 60439, Form 2, Type - 2 requirements. It shall be constructed of minimum 1.6mm
thick electro-galvanized steel coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray
and oven baked. The color shall be RAL 7032 (light grey) or equal. Doors locks shall be
fitted.
Bus bars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity tinned copper and rated for continuous
operation. The phase bar, neutral bar and earth bar shall be identified by approved colour
codes. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross section as the phase bus bar. A sub
feed neutral assembly with a removable link for isolation shall be available as an integral
part of the Distribution board. Earthing bar assembly shall also be available to facilitate
the connection of earth continuity conductors.
All Circuit breakers, Metering and Bus bar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and
drawings. The main MCCB and the feeder breakers shall be of appropriate capacity.
Metering and indication
The Mains supply incomer should be provided with ammeter, a voltmeter and RYB phase
indication lamps. KWH meter shall be provided and shall be of an approved type and
make by the Utility. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be as per Clause 15.0.
Indicating lamps shall be of the long life LED. They shall be connected through
individually fused circuits tapped from the outgoing side of the main switch.
Internal and auxiliary wiring shall be of the 600 / 1000V grade with a minimum cross
section of 2.5-sq. mm.
6.1.3
Panel wiring / Terminal Blocks / Labels

All internal and control wiring shall be 600 / 1000V LSF insulated stranded
copper cable to BS 6231. All cables shall be adequately rated and not less than 2.5
sq.mm., run on cables trays. Each cable shall be properly terminated at both ends with
loops. When wiring is across door hinges, it shall be enclosed by a flexible tubing and be

08 March 2012
P a g e | 123
SPECIFICATIONS
looped to permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection. Plastic
ferrules with correct numbers shall be fitted on all wires to correspond with circuit number
and diagram.
Terminal blocks for power and control wiring shall be of Cage Clamp connection
technique in which the only tool required is a flat bladed screwdriver .Once the
conductor is inserted, the stainless steel cage clamp shall automatically provide the
correct clamping force for a secure connection. Screws terminals shall not be used.
Cables having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and connected
by means of cable jumpers at the terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be grouped
according to the working voltage, power circuit and control circuit. 10% of spare terminals
and not less than two numbers shall be provided on each group of terminal blocAll Circuit
breakers, Feeders' etc. shall be provided with labels of adequate dimensions. Labels shall
be of traffolyte having a white background engraved letters. They shall be screws fixed on
the panel.
Tests to be conducted on the SMDB before dispatch and the Drawings to be furnished is
the same as specified for Main Distribution Boards.
Wall mounted SMDB shall be fixed on a U channel support, and not direct to the wall.
6.2
Motor control centers (MCC)-form 2
6.2.1 General
This specification applies to switchboard designed to feed fans and related equipments.
The design, construction, bus bar arrangement, circuit breaker details, etc., shall be in
accordance with the relevant specifications stated under main distribution boards. All
circuit breaker ratings bus bar ratings and fault levels shall be as shown in the load
schedules and drawings. All chillers shall be provided with the following:
a. Suitable earth leakage protection with adjustable settings from 0.1 1A.
b. Ammeter with CTs and selector switch.
c. Under voltage relay with built in timer and contactor.
d. Suitably rated control supply with ON/OFF switch.
e. Chiller ON / OFF indication lamps.
f. Hour meter for each chiller.
6.2.2
Starters
All motors shall be fed separately from a Motor Control Centre. Starters shall be in
accordance with BSEN 60947 and BSEN 60947 4-1. They shall be protected by circuit
breakers and be generally complying with the following details:
a. 7.5KW and below DOL starting.
b. Above 7.5KW and upto 30KW Star / delta starting.
c. Above 30KW Reduced voltage electronic soft starters.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 124
SPECIFICATIONS
Each starter panel shall be provided with a main incoming MCCB capable of carrying the
full load current.
Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
-
On load triple pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed auxiliary
switches. The MCCB to be mechanically interlocked with the starter component door
and capable of breaking the motor starting current and of making onto a fault at the
motor terminals. Breakers shall be motor protection type. MCCB shall be provided for
any load of 10 hp and above.
Provision to be made for padlocking the MCCB in the OFF position.
Four pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally closed
auxiliary contracts.
All the auxiliary contacts to be wired down to the starter terminal block.
One triple pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current, phase
sequence and single phase protection with adjustable trip settings. External
mechanical hand reset to be provided.
One control circuit MCB or fuse and one copper link.
Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop buttons and a local /
remote / auto selector switch or hand / off / auto switch as required. Each starter
control wiring terminal block shall include control terminals for connection of
remote push buttons, auto circuits and local and remote emergency stop push
buttons.
Where more than one motor with a duty / standby or duty / backup functions
used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty
upon the fault tripping of the selected motor. A duty / standby or sequence
selector switch shall be provided.
Each starter shall be fitted with built-in transformer operated lamps indicating:
Motor running (green)
Motor stopped (red)
Overload tripped (amber)
Each starter panel shall be fitted with an ammeter, volt meter and hour meter and
selector switch for motors 7.5 KW and above
Each starter to be equipped with labels in English and Arabic giving drive
designation, plant number and control operation.
Each starter control wiring shall included control terminal and control relays as
]necessary to achieve any interlocking specified elsewhere.
Adjustable time delay devices for Star Delta Starters.
Reduced voltage electronic soft starters in addition to various motor starting and
stopping options should include the following:

08 March 2012
P a g e | 125
SPECIFICATIONS
Stall protection and jam detection.
Excessive starts per hour.
Under load protection
.
Under voltage, overvoltage, voltage unbalance and phase reversal
protection.
Diagnostics features.
A TP electronic overload relay should be provided as detailed elsewhere in this
specification. In addition, a bypass facility shall be provided.
Starter units for manual operation shall have push buttons for starting and stopping,
together with auxiliary contacts for remote indicator lights where specified. Starter units
arranged for automatic operation shall have hand / Off / Auto controls and remote push
buttons.
All Star Delta starter shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks for star
delta contactor assembly to prevent short circuiting.
6.2.2.1 Enclosure
Panels shall be constructed of a minimum 1.6mm to 2.0mm thick electro galvanized steel
coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and over backed and
protected to IP-54.
Front access shall be arranged for all panels with hinged lift off doors. Dust and damp
proof gasket around the edge and fitted with lockable cam type chromium plated handle
mechanically interlocked with the starting MCCB.
The enclosure for the motor starters are divided into two types as follows:
a. Single starter panel.
b. Multi starter panels.
6.2.2.2 Single starter panel.
This specification shall be applied for starter panels used for starting a single equipment
with a maximum of two motors.
All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into tapped
holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP 2X.
The minimum short circuit rating for the different components shall be 30kA. However,
the contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation and upgrade the same if found
necessary.
6.2.2.3 Multi Starter Panels.
This specification shall be applied for starter panels used for starting more than a single
equipments.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 126
SPECIFICATIONS
The panel shall be constructed to BSEN 60439-1, Form 2, Type - 2 with withdrawable
starter modules with all internal partition in aluzinc of 1mm thick. The terminal for the
external conductor shall be in separate enclosed protected space and shall be separated
by insulated covering.
Each module shall be made of hinged front cover with side panels made of aluzinc sheet
steel. The rear wall shall be made of insulating material.
Busbar shall be of hard drawn high conductivity tinned copper of the stated capacity.
The short circuit rating of the busbars, droppers and associated apparatus shall be 30kA
for 1 second unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
6.2.2.4 Control Panel Internal Wiring
The panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal strips.
The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671. All internal wiring of the
control panel shall be utilizing 300 / 500V grade single core, circular LSF (HR) insulated
and sheathed cable of appropriate current carrying capacity. Minimum size cable that
2
shall be used is 32/0.20 (1 mm ).

The controlling circuits shall be wired using white sheathed cable for live feeds, with black
sheathed neutral conductors.
All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized slotted side, plastic
trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run continuously around
inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then leave trunking slot adjacent to
their location, with any quantity of cables from trunking to control item being formed into a
loom using plastic straps.
A 50% space factor shall be allowed in all trunking and loom strap to cater for both the
cooling and spare capacity requirements.
6.2.3
Fixings
No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the main
cabinet for riveting, bolting, etc.
All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded
inserts).
Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed and
bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with the
possible exception of main panel plates retaining bolts which may be larger.
6.2.4
Identification and Referencing

Each isolator switch, indicator lamp and panel component shall have its function clearly
defined.
Adjacent to each external connection terminal block shall be a label defining the item to
be connected and each terminal individually referenced to the main wiring diagram. Each
circuit breaker and starter shall be labeled to define item protected and rating or overload
setting to be used.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 127
SPECIFICATIONS
For ease of tracing cabling, at each termination position the cable shall be identified with
a numbered Helerman identification ring co-related to the wiring diagram provided with
the control panel.
All labels shall be screw fixed engraved black traffolite having white infilling and clearly
legible letter, graded in size for emphasis and clear identification for control grouping by
larger lettering with smaller lettering for selected operations and indications. 400 volt
warning labels shall be provided as appropriate.
6.2.5
Control Panel Components

For simple/minimal function control panels, indicator lamps shall be of the low voltage 24
volt transformer (trani lamp) type and accord with the signaling colours laid down in BS.
4099. Minimum lens diameter shall be 12.5mm and all lenses on a panel shall be of a
matching size and appearance and removable from the front for lamp replacement. For
general purpose medium to large scale control systems, the indicator lights shall be of the
light emitting diode systems, the trani lamps are not to be used. Circuitry shall be
incorporated to achieve (with a suitable test push button) verification of all lamps
operability.
Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade type crimped/soldered lugs.
6.2.6
Selector Switches
They shall be of the rotary type, rated to suit item controlled and fitted with pointer type
switching knob. Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade type crimped / soldered
lugs.
Where starter / contactor is particularly detailed to be mounted remote from the main
control panel then, in these instances, they shall be of the totally enclosed type,
incorporating motor supply isolator, hand-off- auto-selector switch, latching emergency
power 'off' button and incorporating auxiliary contacts for basic control panel indications.
Starters and contactors shall, however, be located within the control panel and be of the
open type with readily replaceable operating contacts and coils. They shall incorporate
auxiliary contacts as required to achieve controls operation and indications specified.
Starter for motors up to 7.5KW, rated output, shall be of the direct on line start type with
any motor above such limit arranged for star delta start (unless specifically requested
otherwise).
Unless particularly detailed, all motors shall be assumed as operating from a 400 volt 50
HZ 3-phase supply.
All starters shall incorporate under volt release, single phasing and appropriately set
thermal overload protection, together with appropriate auxiliary contact block for required
signaling, etc.
Where motors are duplicated for standby purposes, then they shall be arranged to
automatically change duty upon the fault tripping of the selected motor.
6.2.7
Compensated Equipment
Any motorized valve or damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be arranged
such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated selection and
enable manual opening / closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any compensator unit
mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's purpose made

08 March 2012
P a g e | 128
SPECIFICATIONS
enclosure and be
recommendations.
6.2.8
installed
strictly
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's
Time switch control

Each time switch shall be of the quartz movement type with minimum 24 hour battery
reserve or operated by a 240 volt synchronous motor and of the type incorporating
separate motor supply and control switch terminals and be with a minimum of a 24 hour
self winding clockwork spring reserve.
Unless more sophisticated operation is specified elsewhere, then each time clock shall be
capable of two 'on' and two 'off' operations every twenty-four hour period. Also, any
control time switch incorporated within the panel, shall be complete with an associated
bypass selection facility to manually override 'on/off'.
6.2.9
Control Relays
Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate visual indication that the
operating coil is energized.
Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to ensure relay is vertical above the base
when the control cabinet is in its intended location, with screw type terminals, suitable for
receipt of spade type crimped/soldered lugs.
6.2.10 Circuit Protection

Each item of controlled plant shall be separately protected. Circuit breakers shall be
arranged in a composite bank.
All terminals and bus bars (which shall be solid copper) etc., shall be correctly shrouded
to prevent exposed live contact.
Circuit breakers provided shall incorporate space allowance for 25% increase in capacity,
by later modification, with space for at least three breakers of each size used in the initial
panel circuits.
Isolators shall be rated to make or break the electrical supply to the particular item whilst
such item is running on load.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 129
SPECIFICATIONS
6.3
6.3.1
Tests
Type test
The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be tested in
accordance with the IEC standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity
from a reputed and approved type testing laboratory and certified by an competent
authority.
The following 7 type tests as specified in IEC 60439-1 standards to comply with
requirements of TTA equipment shall be carried out at recognized test laboratories and
certificates from approved test witnessing authority shall be provided for each type test :
Verification of temperature rise limit (IEC Clause 8.2.1)
Verification of the dielectric properties (IEC Clause 8.2.2)
Verification of short circuit withstand strength (IEC Clause 8.2.3)
Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit (IEC Clause 8.2.4)
Verification of clearance and creepage distance (IEC Clause 8.2.6)
Verification of the degree of protection (IEC Clause 8.2.7)
Type test certificates shall be submitted to the consultant engineer for verification.
The panels shall undergo the following tests in the factory before dispatch:
i. Primary Injection Test for all Circuit Breakers.
ii. Secondary Test for all protective relays and meters, CT polarity tests.
iii. Millivolt Drop Test
a. HV Test 2.5kV for 1 min.
b. Insulation test
c. Function Test
For these tests the Consultant shall be invited in time to enable the Consultant to witness
the tests.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 130
SPECIFICATIONS
6.4
Drawings and Information

A drawing pouch / pocket shall be provided in each panel and laminated load schedules
and approved schematic drawings (Framed) shall be providing.
The vendor shall furnish following submittal after placement of order:
a. General Arrangement drawing showing front view, plan, foundation plan, floor
cutouts and trenches for external cables, elevations, transport sections and
weights.
b. Sectional drawings of various types of feeders, panels showing general
constructional features, mounting details of various devices, busbars, current
transformers, cable
boxes, terminal boxes for control cables, etc.
c. Schematic and control wiring diagrams for each type of feeder and protection
including indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.
d. Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, ferrule markings, device terminal
numbers, functions etc.
e. Control wiring diagrams.
Vendor shall provide a copy of the above drawings for approval and a copy of the as built
drawings for records.
The information furnished shall include the following:
- Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.
-
Erection, Operation and maintenance manual complete with all relevant

information, drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories,
characteristics for relays etc.
- An equipment list with detailed specifications and make.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 131
SPECIFICATIONS
6.5 MCB Distribution Boards
6.5.1 Description
The specification hereunder shall be applied to al panel boards referenced on the drawings
/ load schedules as DB's. The distribution board shall be flush / surface mounted split
busbar type and shall be provided with standard extension box to allow cable glanding if
required. The distribution board shall be surface mounted when installed within the
electrical room/service rooms.
Distribution boards shall be provided with an isolator incomer with common ELCBs for
group of lighting circuits and common ELCBs for group of power circuits for each section
of MCBs or RCBOs for each power circuit as shown on schedules.
As a standard item, all MCB boards shall be provided with permanent circuit identification
charts to the approval of the engineer.
MCBs shall comply with IEC 898 and RCBOs shall comply with BSEN 61009. ELCBs
shall comply with BSEN 61008.
DBs inside electrical rooms shall be surface mounted type fixed onto a U channel support.
ELCBs in each DB shall be provided as per requirements of DEWA without any variation.
6.5.2 Enclosures
The MCB Distribution Boards inside the berths shall be surface mounted type. Rigid
plastic with transparent cover or powder coated rustproof sheet steel units, complete with
circuit breakers providing thermal overload and magnetic short-circuit and earth fault
protection as shown on the drawings. The enclosure protection shall be IP 56, while the
complete assembly shall comply with IEC 439-1.
The enclosures within Electrical rooms must be surface mounting type or floor standing.
Powder coated rustproof sheet steel units, complete with circuit breakers providing thermal
overload and magnetic short-circuit and earth fault protection as shown on the drawings.
The enclosure protection shall be IP 31, while the complete assembly shall comply with
IEC 439-1.
Surface wall mounted DBs shall be fixed on U channel support and not direct to the wall.
6.5.3 Busbar
The MCBs shall be mounted on either 3 phase or single phase or split busbars as
appropriate. All spaces which are not provided with breakers shall be covered with blank
plates.
A final sub-circuit neutral assembly and an earthing bar assembly shall be available to
facilitate the connection of neutral conductors and protective conductors respectively.
6.5.4 Breakers
Miniature circuit breakers, RCBOs and earth leakage circuit breaker and shall be
provided as indicated on the load schedules.
The short circuit rating for the MCBs and RCBOs shall be 10KA for DBs.
All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50deg C.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 132
SPECIFICATIONS
6.6
Air Circuit Breakers

Air circuit breakers shall be designed and constructed to have a short circuit breaking
capacity of not less than 50 kA and shall comply with the latest editions of IEC 947-2 and
BS 4752. They shall be of the fully withdrawable type and motor operated. ACB On / Off
pushbuttons with On / Off indication lamps shall be provided. ACB shall communicate with
BMS using Modbus protocol.
3 Pole / 4 pole ACBs shall be provided as shown on drawings.
Suitable automatic safety shutters shall be provided to cover live parts when the ACB is in
the withdrawn position. There shall be 3 distinct positions i.e.
"Connected"
"Test"
"Disconnected-Isolated"
There shall also be a "Withdrawn" position.
ACB's shall have adequately designed are chutes and are shields for fast and effective are
chopping. The protective release shall be of the solid state electronic type having protection
against overloads, short circuits and ground fault with adjustable time and current settings.
The following protections shall be included:
Overload protection (LT)
Short-circuit protection (ST)
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I)
The ACB shall have sufficient auxiliary contacts with minimum 2 NO and 2 NC contacts.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 133
SPECIFICATIONS
6.7
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BS 4752 and IEC 9472. The short circuit breaking capacities of the MCCB's shall be calculated and approved by
the Consultant.
MCCB's shall be of the heavy-duty quick make break type. All MCCB's shall be ambient
temperature compensated to give the ratings indicated in the drawings at 50C for which a
formal certificate confirming that MCCB's have been temperature compensated should be
furnished. Each breaker shall have on each phase a thermal over current release and also
an instantaneous magnetic trip both of the adjustable type. Four pole breakers shall have a
common trip both with a single operating handle and designed so that any overload in one
pole automatically causes all poles to open. Breakers shall be trip free and each shall have
a trip indication independent of ON or OFF positions. To reset from the tripped position the
mechanism shall first pass through the off position. Tripped indication shall be clearly
shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 134
SPECIFICATIONS
6.8
Disconnect switches
Disconnect switches and isolator shall comply with IEC-947.
Disconnect switches shall be provided at each motor controller and appliance location.
Isolators shall be rated to connect and disconnect 5 to 7 times the rated current of the item
being switched. Isolators shall have a fully visual braking characteristic and shall be
provided with padlockable handle interlocked with the door. Isolators exposed to weather
shall be housed within self-extinguished polyester loaded fiberglass panels to IP 65.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 135
SPECIFICATIONS
6.9
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCBs)

Current operated Earth leakage Circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008.
The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electromechanical release and shall
incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. A test
button is to prove operation of the ELCB.
The ELCB's shall have 100mA sensitivity for lighting circuits and 30mA for power circuits.
RCBOs (10kA minimum) shall be provided as shown on schedules which shall be 1 pole
RCBO shall be with sensitivity of 30mA, 100mA as per schedules.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 136
SPECIFICATIONS
6.10 Contactors / Overload Relays / Control Relays / Timers
6.10.1 Contractors
Contactors shall be in conformance to IEC 947-4 / CSA 22.2 No.14 and shall be CE
approved / CSA Certified.
The magnets and contact movements of the contactor shall be horizontal. The contacts
shall be double break, butt type and each moving contact shall be individually spring
loaded. The fixed and moving contacts shall be of silver -cadmium oxide. The contactor
coils shall be continuously rated and shall wound on moulded formers. Contactors shall be
factory calibrated, ambient temperature compensated and sealed. It shall be possible to
attach the contactors to 35mm DIN Mounting Rail (EN 50 022). Power contactors shall be
provided with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC Auxiliary contacts.
The contactors shall provide greater performance in less panel space. There shall be
flexibility in the selection of front mounting or side mounting of auxiliary contacts. The
contactor shall design features for IP 2LX finger protection against accidental contact with
live components, positive drive contacts and protection against manual operation, Auxiliary
and relay contacts shall be compatible with electronic circuits to 17V, 5mA.
6.10.2 Overload Relays
Overload relays shall confirm to IEC 947-4 / CSA C22.2 No 14 and shall be CSA certified
/ CE approved.
The motor overload protection should have a protection choice of trip class 10 or 20. As
a standard, the overload relay shall offer a manually operated trip function, visible trip
indicator and isolated N.O. alarm contacts are to be used to protect motor circuits against
overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage conditions.
The relay range selected shall be such that the full load current of the equipment falls well
within the relay adjustment range. The energy consumption of the relay shall be not
above 150mW.
6.10.3 Timers
Control relays shall conform to IEC 255-10-00 and shall be CSA certified.
Control relays shall be of plug in type and shall have built in LEDs. They shall have
miniature square bases with blade terminals. The contacts shall be of silver cadmium
rated for 5A continuous current. The control relays shall be suitable for wiring with spade
type crimped lugs.
6.10.4 Timers
TIMERS SHALL CONFORM TO IEC 255-1 AND SHALL BE CSA CERTIFIED.
Timer relays with adjustable range for the Star delta starter shall ensure precise
reproducibility of the timing function. The relay shall be equipped with Single pole double
throw 1 Pole change over contact two electrically separated time delayed contact one
normally open and one normally close.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 137
SPECIFICATIONS
6.11 Indication Lamps / Push Buttons / Selector Switches
6.11.1 Indicating lamps
The Indicating lamps shall be LED type.
6.11.2 Push Buttons
Push button shall be flush type mushroom type, lockable with colors in accordance with
BS4099. Push Buttons contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in
NO / NC configuration rated not less than 5A resistive at 230V, 50 Hz. Push Buttons shall
feature a diaphragm seal to protect the button from the entrance of oil, water and other
contaminants. O-ring seals, which rely on lubricants, shall not be used.
Start and stop push buttons shall be of shrouded type.
Emergency stop push buttons shall be of maintained contact, pull to reset and lockable at
EM-stop to prevent reset. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push buttons.
6.11.3 Selector Switches
Selector switches shall be positive action, rotary can switches, which shall incorporate
double break contacts. Selector contacts shall be double break and of hard silver alloy.
They shall have a minimum continuous current rating of 10A and be of a high breaking
capacity. The switch positions shall be marked on all engraved legend plates, which shall
be made from black, white, black traffolyte, and the minimum character size shall be 3
mm. Operating knobs of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators. Hands -Off Auto selector switch shall have three positions with center position as Off.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 138
SPECIFICATIONS
6.12 Site condition
Altitude
: Sea level
Relative Humidity
: 100 %
Design ambient temperature
: 50 deg. C
Surface temperature
: Solar radiation may increase surface temperature up to

80 deg. C.
Rainfall
: 54.4 mm maximum per day.
Atmosphere
: Salipherous atmosphere often containing fine
dust and pollutants in particular CO and H S.
2
6.13 Codes and standards

IEC 38
Standard voltages
IEC 50
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary.
IEC 51
Recommendations for indicating electrical measuring instruments.
IEC 59
Standard current ratings
IEC 947-2
Air Circuit Breaker / Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
IEC 158
Low voltage control gear
IEC 185
Current Transformer.
IEC 186
Voltage Transformer
IEC 255
Relays
IEC 269
LV fuses with high breaking capacity.
IEC 277
Definitions for switchgear and controlgear.
IEC 292
Low voltage motor starter.
IEC 337
Control switches.
IEC 341
Push button switches
IEC 408
Low voltage air break switches, air break disconnectors, air break switch
disconnectors and fuse combination units.
IEC 439-1
Factory built assemblies of low voltage switchgear and controlgear BS

EN 60439-1
IEC 445
Identification of equipment terminals

and of termination of certain
conductors, including general rules of alphanumeric system.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 139
SPECIFICATIONS
IEC 446 Identification of insulated and bare conductor by colors
IEC 529
Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
IEC 898
Miniature Circuit Breaker.
(The equivalent British standards for the above IEC specifications shall also apply)

08 March 2012
P a g e | 140
SPECIFICATIONS
6.14 Volt Meter, Ameter & Powerfactor Meter
Volt meters, ammeter and PF meters used throughout the project shall be of the digital type
and shall be fitted into the front of the panels.
The meters shall have a dielectric strength of 2kV at 50Hz for 1 minute with 7 segments
light emitting diode displays and the figure height shall be 20mm.
Meters shall have 4 digits display and shall have an accuracy of 1% or better.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 141
SPECIFICATIONS
6.15 Swichboard Operatorss Mat
In front of all electrical switchboards in the electrical rooms a 1M wide carbon free rubber
mat or mats shall be provided, having a ribbed upper surface and being of such length to
suit the full operating extent of each switchboard.
The insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one minute
voltage test at 2 KV.
6.16 Coordination
It is Contractors responsibility to provide a coordination calculation to establish actual
tripping time between breakers and for proper coordination level between down stream and
upstream breakers. Contractor must upgrade breaker types if required to achieve the
above without any variation.
Short circuit level calculation also must be submitted for approval.
6.17 Harmonic Analyser
Digital Harmonic Analyzer with connections (modbus) to the BMS shall be provided in each
main LV Panel.
6.18 Thermal imaging
Thermal imaging shall be carried out on LV switchgear panel, busbars, bus joints, busbar
connection points, tap-off units, etc. before handing over and at the end of maintenance
period.
6.19 Energy monitoring unit
Digital energy monitoring unit with MODBUS or equivalent communication capabilities shall
be provided in each main LV Panel and as shown on drawings and shall be integrated with
BMS.
7
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

Power factor correction capacitors & Regulations
These shall be provided as per TCVN requirements.
The power factor correction capacitor shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC Standard
and shall be double insulated dry type with metalized polypropylene dielectric to IP 545
and shall incorporate a discharge resistance and harmonic filters. An overpressure
disconnector switch shall be fitted on each capacitor as an additional safety measure.
rd
Capacitors shall have aluminum housing and be detuned to below 3 harmonics.

Capacitance variation due to ambient temperature shall be taken into consideration and
the capacitors shall be de-rated to give the required capacitance at 50 deg. C.
Capacitors shall be protected by circuit-breakers and wired through cables with capacity of
1.6 times the capacitor rating.
Where multi steps capacitor bank is used the power factor shall be maintained at a set
value indicated by the reactive power regulator which shall control the opening and closing
of the capacitor switching contactors. Number of capacitors to be connected through the
regulator, in the event of Power failure or when the Power is restored, shall be in
accordance with the System reactive power.
The high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken into consideration by
08 March 2012
P a g e | 142
SPECIFICATIONS
using fast acting contactor designed for capacitor switching and which shall be able to
handle 100 times the rated current. In addition to that, the cable connecting the contactor
to the busbar shall be installed in a way that self inductance is produced e.g. by coiling the
cable into necessary number of loops along the cable run.
Capacitor shall be designed and constructed to with stand harmonic currents and
additional filters shall be provided to withstand harmonic currents.
The capacitor panel supply shall be by means of isolating switch with door interlocking
device. Each bank of capacitors shall be controlled by its own contactor, sized for the
capacitive load and a set of three HRC fuses. Choke coils shall be provided which protect
the capacitor banks from switch on inrush currents. The electronic regulator, indicator
lamps for mains on, banks on, auxiliary circuits on, Auto-Off- manual switches for each
bank shall be mounted on the front of the panel.
Capacitors shall meet the requirements of BS EN 60831-1/2, IEC 60831-1/2 and its
reliability shall be recognized by the mark UL810. Capacitors are to be manufactured by
self-healing metalized polypropylene film with low losses. Capacitors shall generally be of
cylindrical aluminum case equipped with M12 bottom fixing stud. Capacitors are to be fixed
with overpressure disconnector and discharge resistor. Temperature category: -25 / +50
deg. Celsius. PCB dielectrics shall not be used.
An Electronic regulator shall be provided to control the switching on and off of the banks of
capacitors. It shall work with a current signal 0.5 and 5Amps and return to zero for
absence in voltage. It should be equipped with display facilities for Volts, amp on the CT
secondary and power factor.
Capacitors shall be provided with harmonic active filters in conjunction with detuned
capacitor banks to limit the total harmonic distortion below the Specified limits in IEEE 519.
8
UPS
8.1
UPS SYSTEM (RPA)
8.1.1 Scope
The specification covers the design, supply, deliver, Installation, testing and
commissioning of a continues duty Uninterruptible Power Supply system, 50 Hz, 380/
220V, 3 phase four wire system complete with 12 years design life maintenance free
sealed lead acid battery.
The uninterrupted power supply system hereafter referred as the UPS System, shall
operate in conjunction with the existing power distribution system. In the event of an
emergency it shall be able to supply independently clean and regulated uninterrupted
power supply to the critical loads.
The UPS system and all associated equipment and components shall be manufactured in
accordance with the EN 50091-2/IEC 62040 standards. The UPS system Manufacturer
must be ISO 9001 certified and must have minimum 25 years of experience in design and
manufacturing.
The UPS system furnished as redundant- parallel system. The units shall have provision
for all necessary interface connections and ancillary items such that it can be easily and
08 March 2012
P a g e | 143
SPECIFICATIONS
economically expanded up to 8 units at a future time with minimum disruption for increased
capacity or to provide fully redundant system.
The redundant meaning the system has no single point of failure (including no master
slave relationships or common parallel electronic) with proven installation of more than 5
years will be acceptable. The UPS system shall have decentralized bypass redundant
communication bus between the units.
The Local Supplier / Agent must have minimum 5 years proven experience in the field of
UPS and Power solutions in the similar magnitude Projects in Vietnam market. The
Supplier / Agents should have minimum 10 years extensive experience and factory trained
Service Engineer and Technicians to carry out the execution. A fully equipped in house
workshop facility shall be available within Vietnam. The Supplier shall furnish the details
Engineers & Technicians and available testing & commissioning toll along with material
submittal.
Rating to be determined by contractor
Configuration
Parallel Redundant
8.1.2
Equipment Summary
The equipment should consist of a three phase, Fully Controlled, Rectifier charger,
Battery bank; three phase inverter, static bypass and manual bypass. The uninterruptible
power supply which is connected between the mains and the consumer should guarantee
a safe power supply for a specified period of time with the following features:
a. Optimal quantity of the output voltage
b. Prevention from spikes, superpositions, transient over-voltages etc.
c. Prevention from voltage variations and mains failures
d. Prevention from frequency variations
e. True single phase regulation
f. Low noise
g. Compact fully modular design
h. Communication to IBMS as specified in IBMS spec through modbus or equivalent
protocol.
i. Should comply with EN50091-1, EN50091-2, EN50091-3 and EN60950
8.1.3
Equipment Configuration
In addition to the standard system the UPS should also consist of the following:
a. 12-pulse rectifier as standard for greater than 40 KVA for significant reduction of
input current harmonics less than THDi 9.6%.
b. Input isolation transformer for galvanic separation of UPS from mains/utility
supply to improve noise immunity but primarily as a safety device to prevent backfeed of DC voltage onto the mains.
c. Intelligent energy management mode shall be a built-in feature.
d. UPS data protection software compatible with latest operating system.
e. Back feed protection system.
f. Remote monitoring and control facility

08 March 2012
P a g e | 144
SPECIFICATIONS
g. Emergency Power Off (EPO)
h. Generator ON contact to ensure reduced charging from DG Set.
i. Addressable Battery Management System
th
j. In-put filter for 5 harmonics to reduce input current THDi to less than 5% and
improve the power factor to 0.9 at full load.
th
th
th
th
k. Active filter (distortion control unit) , stepped filter for 5 , 7 ,11 and 13
harmonics to reduce reflected current harmonics THDi to a value of less than 5%
and to improve the power factor to 0.95 minimum to 0.98 at full load. The filter must
never present a capacitive load to the mains.
8.1.3.1 UPS System Description

UPS shall be of double or delta conversion type. Due to reduction of harmonics (THD)
filters shall be adopted maxi at input side.
The batteries shall have to be stored in a conditioned area approx 20C.
The UPS shall power the emergency lighting, fire alarm, security and communication
systems (Voice / data) and the ticketing installation.
The fire alarm and security installation also shall have a standalone power backup.
using the above options, in following manner based on the rating of the UPS.
Rating
KVA
in
Configuration
th
3.0 to 40
KVA
6 pulse with
Harmonic Filter
60KVA
and above
12
pulse
with
Galvanic isolation
Distortion
Control
Unit
Input p.f
Output p.f
THDi %
0.9
0.9
Less
5%
than
0.9
Less
5%
than
0.95
0.98
to
When 2 nos or more UPS systems are connected in parallel the following configuration of
Rectifiers shall be compulsorily adopted to further reduce the THDi. The manufacturers
specific confirmation compliance statement shall be issued along with the submittal. A
harmonic analyzer report shall be taken during the load test at site
2 x 12 pulse, UPS System in Parallel 24 pulse configuration & THDi < 2.3%
The UPS system should mainly consist of the following major components:
Input L1, L2, L3, N, PE
Rectifier circuit Breaker
Static bypass circuit Breaker
Manual Bypass circuit Breaker
Battery Circuit Breaker
Output Circuit Breaker
08 March 2012
P a g e | 145
SPECIFICATIONS
Output terminals L1, L2, L3, N, PE

Rectifier & Inverter
Static Switch & Manual Bypass
Back feed Protection k. Output Isolation Transformer
Battery Bank for required autonomy
External input Isolator / Breaker panel
External output isolator / Breaker panel
External output isolator / Breaker panel
The equipment supplier shall submit a detailed construction drawing and schematic
drawings along with material submittal as a part of the submittal. The construction
drawing shall be provided by the Factory duly signed and approved by the Manufacturers
design division. The Factory type test certificates (original from direct Manufacturer) shall
be issued for similar rating along with submittal. The submittal will not be reviewed without
full technical documents as this equipment is going to feed the most critical loads.
8.1.3.2 UPS System Electrical Characteristics
UPS shall be redundant parallel with battery backup for 30 minutes.
The UPS system shall meet the following electric characteristics.
A). Rectifier
Input Power
Tolerance
Voltage
Frequency
Power Factor
DC Voltage ripple
DC current ripple
Charging Characteristics
B) Battery
No. of Cells
Float Voltage
End of Discharge
Battery type
Charging type
Control & Monitoring
C) Inverter
Output Power
Tolerance of output voltage

DC
Voltage DC
Voltage
380 / 220 V
Tolerance
320 460V
50Hz
Refer details.
<1%
Max. 5% of the Batt. Ah
capacity.
IU
(DIN
41773),
Temp.
Compensated floating voltage.
180 or 192
2.27 VPC (volt per cell)
1.65 VPC for 60 min. Aut
SMFB/ Ni cd/ VRLA/ LATB
C20
Digital Signal Processing
380/220V, 3 phase, 4 wire

1% static (with balanced load)
2% static (with unbalanced
load)
08 March 2012
P a g e | 146
SPECIFICATIONS
Tolerance of Phase Angle
Out put Frequency
Total Harmonics
Linear Load
Control & Monitoring
Non
Load
Phase Displacement
100%
balanced
100%
unbalanced
At 50% load
step
Voltage Transients
Linear
2 degree (100% balanced

load)
50Hz(adjustable to 60Hz)
0.25% 3% (selected in
0.25% steps) With mains
synchronization 0.001% free
running
<2%
< 3% (to EN 50091)
At 100% load
step
Static
load
100%
By
mains
recovery
Recovery time
Overload capacity
Short circuit current
Crest Factor
Adjusting time
125% for 10 minutes

200% for 500ms thereafter
125% for 4.5sec. Acc. to EN
50091/1
150% for 1 minutes
20milliseconds within1 % of
the nominal value
8.1.3.3 Equipment Construction

The UPS system construction and technical characteristics of equipment cubicle shall
comply with EN 50091-1-1 and EN 50091-1-2 / IEC 62040. The design of enclosure shall
be suitable for proposed mode of forced cooling. The cooling arrangement from forced
bottom to top by internal propeller type blowers. The heat dissipation of the switching
components shall be eliminated by independent propeller type blower fans. However, the
heat dissipated by surrounding components, cards inside the cubicle should be laminated
by axial / radial fan. The minimum life expectancy of these axial fans shall not be less
than 65000 hours and propeller type blower life expectancy shall be min. 150000 hours.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 147
SPECIFICATIONS
The manufacturers technical details of the fans shall be issued along with the submittal
The speed of the fans shall vary according to the connected load and ambient
temperature in the equipment cabinet; this turns less noise and longer life fan expectancy.
This feature further increases UPSs efficiency due to lower losses. The cubicle with
forced ventilation should consist of redundant fan with automatic duty standby
arrangement. The fan failure shall be indicated with an audible/ visual alarm.
The UPS system processing electronic shall use surface mounted device (assembly)
circuit technology. This shall provide in improvement in the signal to noise ratio, and
prolongs calibration stability, therefore more immunity against electrical disturbances.
This technology shall allow higher PCB integration resulting in the higher reliability and
serviceability of the UPS from front access.
The electrostatic discharge immunity of the switchgear cubicle should be up to 4kV direct
contact or 8 kV air discharge. All the live parts shall be fully shrouded in accordance with
BS 5486: part 2. Adequate clearance should be allowed between the live parts and the
cubicle.
The installation of the cubicle shall be suitable for positioning against wall and flour
mounted on suitable mounting plinth or on raised floor area. There shall be no access
required from rear position. The access of components shall be designed to operate from
the front and side panels. The external access for the cable connection should be
standard bottom, front and top side as optional.
The design of UPS system control shall be easy access for maintenance and
replacement of faulty components from front access. The UPS system shall be suitable
for direct wall resting type with no rear access in case the space of UPS Room is
restricted. Hence the proposed equipment shall be fully front accessible to each and
every components with dead front shrouding.
8.1.4 UPS Components Description

8.1.4.1 Rectifier Chargers
The Rectifier / Charger must consist of 12 pulse SCR bridge which converts the 3 phase
utility voltage into a controlled and regulated DC voltage in order to supply the Inverter
and simultaneously charge the battery bank.
The 12-pulse rectifier should consist of two 6-pulse rectifiers in parallel with a galvanic
Isolation transformer and Phase shift technology thereby limiting the harmonic feedback
to the mains. The Rectifier shall be controlled by microprocessor-based software along
with DSP (digital signal processing) technology.
The rectifier charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded Inverter and at
the same time maintain the battery in a fully charged condition. If the battery bank is fully
charged, the rectifier/charger shall recharge the battery to 90% if its fully charged
condition within in 12 hours and at the same time supply full load current to the system.
The rectifier/ charger must contain a timed walk-in circuit to limit the inrush current. The
allowable initial inrush surge and walk-in time circuit be adjustable and not exceed 30 sec.
A sequential walk in of every single rectifier/charger shall be automatically executed
incase of the start up of a parallel system in order to limit the inrush current to the value of
single system. The sequential rectifier soft start in RPA mode shall avoid over rating of
08 March 2012
P a g e | 148
SPECIFICATIONS
Generator, over heating of supply cable and avoid stress on incoming MCCB/ Fuses.
The rectifier/charger output current and voltage shall be limited to the battery suppliers
recommendation.
8.1.4.2 Inverter
The inverter will convert the DC-voltage to AC voltage coming from the rectifier or from
the battery into a regulated AC-voltage, must be accomplished by power transistors of the
IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors) type controlled which meets all requirements of
modern data processing units according to wave-shape as well as voltage and frequency
stability. The waveform shall be fed through a filter circuit and protected by fuses.
The Inverter output voltage should be regulated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
controlled by microprocessor-based software along with DSP (digital signal processing)
technology to ensure that the voltage THDi is being limited especially for non-linear loads.
The output filter capacitors shall be provided with a quick discharging circuit, which shall
automatically discharge the capacitor to safe value within a short time after the shutting
down of the Inverter. The neutral of the Inverter out put shall be electrically isolated from
the UPS system chassis.
Failure of any components or power stage shall not interrupt the AC output instead it shall
disconnect itself from the configuration while transferring the load to the static switch and
then activate an alarm.
Inside the inverter, IGBT`s of a switching frequency of 4 kHz shall be used. The losses
occur due to switching frequency of the inverter shall be minimized as per connected
load. The inverter output should be short circuit proof (electronic short circuit protection).
The regulation and controlling of the system should be built up by a 16-bit micro-controller
using DSP technology.
A control battery shall be provided to furnish logic power, which is independent of the
Inverter input power. The battery shall provide power to alarm system to maintain events
records after a UPS failure and shut down.
8.1.4.3 Static Bypass
The static bypass must consist of an SCR/Thyristor-switch, switching the mains over to
the UPS output. During normal operation the inverter output is switched to the UPS output
while the bypass is blocked. The electronic bypass switch shall be equipped with two
contactors in series, which provide to supply the load from utility to Inverter. The
electronic bypass switch shall consist of a pair of microprocessor controlled thyristors and
contactor in series avoiding a back feed into the mains as per IEC 62040. The electronic
bypass switch shall be able to activate manually by a switch/push button to affect the
transfer. The switching time from Inverter to reserve and vice-versa shall be of No break
when synchronized.
In the event of inverter overload or disturbances, inverter switch-off, the load must
automatically switch over to the bypass without a break. The static bypass should be able
to feed 2000% of the UPS nominal current for one period thereby enabling safety burnout
of the fuses.
The automatic retransfer to the inverter should be blocked if a transfer to the mains was
initiated six times within one minute or if the inverter was not synchronized with the mains.
Bypass Circuit Characteristics
Overload Capability: 150% constant
200% for I minute
08 March 2012
P a g e | 149
SPECIFICATIONS
2000% for I period
Input voltage: 3x 380/220 V10%
Static switch change over technology: SCR/Thyristor
8.1.4.4 Manual Bypass
Servicing, tests and adjustments shall be carried out without interrupting the load. To do
this a set of manually controlled switches shall be provided that enables the load to be
directly supplied from the mains and to disconnect and isolate the rectifiers, inverters and
the static bypass. The manual bypass feeds the load in case of maintenance or
disturbances of the UPS.
8.1.4.5 Power Conditioner Mode
If the Battery only must be taken out of the service for maintenance or replacement, it will
be disconnected from the rectifier/charger and Inverter by means of a circuit breaker or
Fuse Disconnector.
8.1.4.6 Parallel Operation
When 2 nos or more UPS systems are connected in parallel the specification clause 1.2.3
must be complied to achieve harmonic less than 2.3%. The Parallel redundant operation
should be made possible by using the UPS system with an additional paralleling PCB
called RPI (Redundant Parallel Interface).
With the RPI mounted in each unit, paralleling upto 8 UPS systems should be possible.
The Phase difference between each parallel unit should not be more than 0.03
milliseconds.
In addition to the standard functions as uninterruptible power supply to the load, total
power control and protection of the load from mains distortion, the parallel redundant
system should guarantee an uninterrupted power supply even in case of an internal
failure in one of the UPS units. Additionally, the power rating of an UPS can be increased
by working in parallel operation without any interruption to load connected.
The UPS-units should work without any need of external elements or switches to control
UPS modules in parallel system. The Parallel redundant configuration should not work on
any Master Slave concept instead Peer to Peer concept with no single point
failure is preferred.
A 9-pole shielded wire must interconnect all paralleled UPS systems. The UPS should
consist of an ACTIVE CURRENT CONTROL, which means that installation of coils for
control on the output will not be necessary. Each UPS in the parallel redundant
configuration should consist of its own battery bank.
The bypass for the parallel units should be modular and not centralized i.e., each UPS will
have its own bypass. These will ensurea. That all the bypass units share the power equally when the inverter transfers the load
onto the bypass and each bypass will be capable of handling full rated load
independently.
b. In the event that one UPS has to be removed from the parallel configuration the
removed unit can be utilized as a fully functional stand-alone system elsewhere
8.1.4.7 Energy Management
A intelligent energy management software shall be provided for the programming of
system operation parameters The software shall allow user to program the operating
08 March 2012
P a g e | 150
SPECIFICATIONS
hours of each UPS in the system during low load conditions so that each UPS operating
at its optimum efficiency. When UPS systems are in parallel and connected load is less
than 50% of the capacity of UPS capacity then redundant UPS shall be shut down until
the load demand goes above 50%. If during off peak condition one UPS fails, the
software shall be able to switch ON one of the two non operating UPS in order to achieve
redundancy request in max 30 sec time.
8.1.5
Operating Panel and Display

The UPS-system should be equipped with an operating-panel with self illuminating 4 x 20
lines LCD Display and a LED indications shall be present when any one of the following
conditions:
Rectifier : mains out of tolerance, control logic failure.
Battery : low voltage, high voltage, earth fault, contactor closing or opening failure,
insufficient power.
Inverter : Fuse failure, contactor closing and opening failure, voltage out of
tolerance, out put power insufficient, overload.
Bypass : mains out of tolerance, contactor closing or opening failure.
Load : Overload, Load locked on inverter, load locked on bypass.
General : Load off for overload, battery low and over temperature conditions,
Inverter and mains not synchronized, UPS overload.
A mimic-diagram with LEDs, showing the status of the different paths
A keyboard with the following functions (from left to right):
a. Upwards (cursor-function)
b. Downwards (cursor-function)
c. Return (enter)
d. BUZZER-off
e. RESET
The actual status of the UPS should be read out by the block-diagram with the LEDs and
additionally by the messages shown on the display. All alarms will be acoustically
indicated, too. They have to be acknowledged by pressing the buzzer-key. All necessary
information should be shown on the display.
The front panel of the UPS consisting of a two lined alphanumeric display plus 5 function
keys should allow the complete monitoring of the UPS status and the control of some
UPS-operations.
The general concept of using the operating panel is menu-orientated. The included
menus with their hierarchical structure must be chosen by cursor or return. By pressing
the return-key, the chosen menu will be carried out; via cursor it must be possible to
choose different options within the actual menu.
The menu should consist of these entries at least:
Measures : all actual values of the UPS should be displayed
Alarms : all actual and stored alarms should be displayed
Special : Special tests of the UPS should be performed; time and date Should be
set (Password protected for access to qualified personnel only).

08 March 2012
P a g e | 151
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1.5.1 Display and Measures

The UPS system main control and monitoring panel with LCD back lit display shall
include the following events indications with date and time.
Rectifier :
mains rectifier okay, rectifier ON/OFF
Battery :
start battery test, end battery test, no conditions for test.
Inverter :
Inverter cannot be switched ON/OFF, Inverter ON/OFF
Bypass :
mains bypass okay, power in sufficient, bypass locked
Load :
load OFF, multiple load transfer, load bypass / Inverter
General :
maintenance bypass ON/OFF, Inverter and mains synchronized /
not synchronized, input circuit breaker open/ closed.
Output :
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Output Current
Load %
Load in KW at actual
Load in KVA at actual
Bypass :
Bypass voltage
Bypass frequency
Inverter :
Inverter voltage
Inverter Frequency
AC/DC (inverter input) : AC/DC output voltage
Battery :
Battery voltage
Battery type
Battery Autonomy
Battery Autonomy (%)
8.1.5.2 History of Stored Alarm
The UPS system through the LCD must be able to view upto to 256 alarm events with
date and time and can able to store upto min. 2 years of information with date and time
stamp.
8.1.5.3 Operating Status Mimic Panel:
A mimic panel shall incorporating LED indicators depicting the complete single line
diagram of the UPS system shall be weather proof silk screened to display the status. A
synoptic diagram of the UPS representing actual operational status with integrated LEDs
and power indications shall be provided.
STATUS
ALARMS
DC voltage within tolerance

Battery has normal capacity
Inverter within tolerance
Inverter feeds load
Bypass within tolerance
Tolerance
Battery is already discharged
Battery capacity is close to zero
Phase lock loop fault
Load supplied by the bypass
Mains fault
Rectifier fault
Rectifier fuse is blown
Thermal image
Rectifier output voltage out of

08 March 2012
P a g e | 152
SPECIFICATIONS
Inverter Bridge is blocked due to
excess current
Retransfer between bypass and
Inverter blocked.
8.1.5.4 Battery Bank
When the battery voltage reaches its end, the UPS is switched off automatically to
prevent an abnormal discharging of the battery. The End Cell voltage of the batteries is to
be maintained at 1.65 Volt/Cell. The batteries selected will be according to Euro bat
specifications. After recovery of the mains within the given autonomy time the rectifier
automatically takes over the feeding of the inverter without interruption and the Battery
will be recharged.
The RPA - UPS System must be provided with independent Battery Bank for each UPS
for stated autonomy time. The battery type shall be Absorbed Glass Mat type, sealed lead
acid totally maintenance free with 12 years service life at 25C and capable of supporting
the stated autonomy time. The batteries shall be suitable for multiple position mounting.
Where the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same in
standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, on purpose built
support stand/enclosure.
Where the Batteries are subject to boost charge, the surface temperature of the batteries
within any cubicle shall not exceed 35 deg centigrade when operated in an ambient
temperature of 25 deg centigrade. At the end of the specified autonomy period, the out
put voltage shall not be less than 90% of the nominal voltage at the nominal load in
accordance to BS EN 50171.The batteries shall fully comply with BS 6290 part 4, IEC
896-2 and DIN 43534. The operating temperature shall be - 20C to 55C. The proposed
batteries shall comply the following:
a. Low self discharge
b. Spill proof and leak proof
c. Completely maintenance free, sealed construction.
d. Increased durability and deep cycle ability for heavy demand application.
e. Value regulated Max internal pressure 2.5 psi.
f. FAA and IATA approved as non-hazardous.
The 99% of the gas generated during normal operation shall be internally recombined.
The pole caps shall be Neoprene to prevent accidents. All interconnecting terminals must
be factory manufactured, solid or laminated tinned copper fully insulated and shrouded at
both the ends. The cable between the shelves and main station shall be rubber insulated
copper multi strand
Batteries must be installed in accordance with EN 50272-2 and to the Engineers
approval.
Specified Battery Manufacturers:
Exide - USA or Europe

National - Japan
Yuasa - Japan
Celltec - USA and Johnson USA
Battery original manufacturers catalogues and calculation details shall be submitted as

part of submittal.
8.1.5.5 Superior Battery Management:
A fully addressable superior battery management shall be an integral part of the UPS
System as batteries are the core of the essential system. This equipment guaranties the
08 March 2012
P a g e | 153
SPECIFICATIONS
optimal utilization and charging of battery groups on a continual and long-term basis to
maximize the battery life. The flow of charging current from the Rectifier is fully monitored
and regulated for each Battery and report back to Controller. This system shall allow the
end user to replace of a single faulty battery with similar or any other brands.
The system shall increase minimum 30% life of the Battery and control / monitor the
temperature, voltage and internal resistance of each Battery. The controller shall have
Ethernet port for remote monitoring and controlling.
The Battery Management shall be designed for
a. Auto adaptive adjustment of the Battery group.
b. Intelligent charging Distribution
c. Measurement and Analysis
d. Temperature monitoring & compensation
e. Input display and Management
f. The battery management system shall allow the end user to replace a single
battery when found faulty. The system must be designed with minimum design life
of 25 years and warranty of minimum 5 years. The system shall withstand a
temperature of 45 deg centigrade.
8.1.5.6 Battery testing
Monitoring battery health shall be carried out by a addressable / programmable automatic
test. The battery test should be carried out by a special function via the menu. Indication
of the battery test during and after should be displayed on the LCD status of each battery
with its address and rack level.
8.1.5.7 Battery Cabinets
The Battery Cabinet shall manufacture and supplied by original UPS manufacturer and no
locally manufactured cabinet or open rack is acceptable. The cabinet shall be fully
demountable type with access in the front, top and all the side to load the batteries and
later for maintenance, when the batteries are situated in an external cabinet. Battery
Cabinet Frame shall be made with 3.0 thick sheet steel sections with door of 2.0 mm
thick. The panel shall be min. of IP 21-category. The Battery compartment shall be
provided with min 2.5 mm thick frame grating, which shall have load-bearing capacity of
min 600 kg per shelve. The grating shall be slotted which allows cross ventilation for the
Batteries in all the shelves, which would provide enough cross ventilation as stipulated in
EN 50272-2.
Provide adequate rating double pole fused isolator in each cabinet to protect DC voltage.
The Fused Isolator shall comply with BSEN 50171.
8.1.6
Communication
It should be possible to connect a PC through the RS 232 serial interface. This facilitates
the communication between the UPS and a PC. The program allows controlling the UPS
status in a clear arranged way. For connection a DB-9 connector according to DIN 41652
shall be connected inside the UPS.
Remote control and Monitoring should be possible via RS 485 interface. For integration to
BMS a Modbus or JBUS protocol should be provided. An SNMP adapter for
communication via TCP/IP network should also be provided. Any communicating devices
are required to be integral part of UPS system and should not expose outside UPS
system.
8.1.7
Standards and Regulations

The equipment proposed must be in conformity with the following standards and
guidelines

08 March 2012
P a g e | 154
SPECIFICATIONS
Electromagnetic Compatibility
89/336/EWG
as per European guidelines
Low voltage guide line

73/23/EWG
as per European guidelines
Safety standards
EN 50091-1, EN60950
EMC
EN 50091-2
Performance
EN 50091-3
IEC
62040 - 1
8.1.7.1 Environmental Conditions

The UPS system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following
environment conditions in which it must operate without mechanical and electrical
damage or degradation of operating characteristics:
Ambient Temperature : 0-to 40 deg. Cent. without derating
Relative Humidity
: up to 95%
Altitude
: 1000 meters from sea level
The UPS system shall be provided with EMI/RFI suppression following EN-50091-2 / IEC
62040
The Audible noise level generated by the UPS System under any condition of normal
operation shall not exceed an allowable sound pressure level measured at 1m from the
doors closed conditions as below:
3 KVA to 30 KVA
40 55 db(A) Load and temperature dependent
40 KVA to 60 KVA
60 dB(A)
80 KVA to 120 KVA
63 dB(A)
150 KVA to 200 KVA 65 dB(A)
8.1.8
Submittals and Proposals

The material submission shall be in sufficient details to show compliance to the
specification clauses and shall include a full set of descriptive and original technical
literature duly marked and highlighted with the clauses / page numbers against each
compliance. The following information shall be submitted along with technical submittal:
a. System configuration and description with single line drawings.
b. Function relationship of various equipment and heat dissipation of the units.
c. Layout plan of control panel, alarm panel, and mimic panel.
d. Layout drawing of the UPS room, Dimension and weight of equipment, and
battery weight.
e. Battery design calculation, which shall include all losses.
f. Battery rack and individual shelves design calculation.
g. A detail description of acceptance test procedure and checklist.
h. Original catalogues.
8.1.9
Installation
The following services are to be provided by the contractor:
i. Transport and handling including lifting by crane to UPS room.
j. Equipment installation as per guidelines of the manufacturer.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 155
SPECIFICATIONS
k. The UPS & Battery Cabinets shall be suitable for floor mounting and should be
installed on a 200mm GI (painted) pedestal.
l. Cable entry will be from bottom however top entry should also be possible as
per site requirements.
8.1.10 Testing and Commissioning
Testing on the UPS shall include the following:
m. Input / Output / Battery cable checks as per technical specs.
n. Compliance with specification
o. Sequence of Operation including emergency cases.
p. Actual load bank test to check the following: Back up time, Load Transfer from
normal power to UPS as per manufacturers recommendation.
Variable Frequency Drives

9.1 General
9.1.1 General Description
This Specification describes the requirements for the 400V Variable Frequency
Drive Controllers (VFD). The 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers shall be
designed and provided in accordance with this Specification and the attached data
sheets. The proposed Manufacturers installation requirements should be complied
by the Manufacturers as part of the Contract including shielded power cables (if
required), enclosure for VFDs, earthing requirements, etc to achieve EMC
Compatible installation. All details shall be furnished as part of the submittal.
9.1.2
Scope of supply
The scope of supply includes the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of the 400V
VFDs as described above. The VFDs shall comply with EMC directives and provide with
filters. All VFDs shall be communicating type using LON / Modbus.
9.1.3
Supplied by Contractor
Equipment unloading and storage at the Job Site.
9.1.4 Codes and Standards
9.1.4.1 All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
edition of the applicable:
NFPA 70
IEC 146
EN Standard / CE marked for EMC directives:
Emissions
Immuinty
EN 50081-1
EN 50082-1
EN 50081-2
EN 50082-2
EN 55011 Class A
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8
EN 55011 Class B
EN 50178
9.1.4.2 EN 60204-1
08 March 2012
P a g e | 156
SPECIFICATIONS
The manufacturer shall furnish the product as listed and classified by underwriters
laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 157
SPECIFICATIONS
9.1.5 Environmental Conditions
9.1.5.1 The VFD product line shall be capable of operating normally in an environment with an
ambient temperature range of 0 C to 50 C with a relative humidity of up to 95% (noncondensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5 C
above 50 C not exceeding 60 C.
9.1.5.2 The product line shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an
ambient temperature range of 0 C to 65 C.
9.1.5.3 The nominal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 158
SPECIFICATIONS
9.1.6 Product Delivery and Handling
9.1.6.1 Ship controllers in convenient sections crated and protected, bearing in mind the hazards
of transportation.
9.1.6.2 All necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be suitably packed
and identified to facilitate field assembly.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 159
SPECIFICATIONS
9.2 Products
9.2.1 General
9.2.1.1 The variable speed drive controllers technical requirements shall be in accordance with
the data sheets. Seller shall be responsible for ensuring that under all operating
conditions:
a. The controllers and their characteristics shall be compatible with their respective driven
production motor and the plant control system. Seller shall obtain speed (frequency)
range required and maximum frequency permitted for each type of controller from the
load equipment supplier.
b. The VFD shall be suitable for use with high efficiency Design B, 400 V motors.
c. The total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage in the plant electrical and local DEWA
systems shall not exceed 5% and no individual harmonic shall exceed 3% during normal
plant operation.
d. Computerised harmonic analysis studies to IEEE Standard 519; copies of the studies shall
be provided with the proposal.
e. The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM) using latest generation
IGBTs with isolating contactors and line reactors.
9.2.2 Design Requirements
9.2.2.1 The VFD controllers shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volt 15%, 3 phase, 50 Hz
input power supply and 0-400 Volt, 3 phase, 0.5 to 400 Hz output. No transformer shall
be used on either the input or output of the VFD.
9.2.2.2 Each controller shall comprise:
a. Enclosure with filters and gaskets construction, mounted on steel sills.
b. Incoming supply terminals complete with cable lugs.
c. Padlockable line disconnect switch with bolt on HRC fuses in each phase.
d. 110% overload capacity above motor service factor demand (115%) for 30 minutes.
e. Short circuit and current limit protection.
f. Surge (TVSS) protection.
g. Stop/Start contactor to ensure when the motor is not running, no voltage is present
on the motor power terminals.
h. Wireways with removable gland plates.
i. Incoming power system isolation transformer, if required, with thermal sensing in each
phase, and filters to limit on the plant 400V bus THD to 5%; no single harmonic to be
more than 3%.
j. Drive operation man machine interface (MMI) keyboard.
k. Stepless non reversing minimum and maximum motor speed adjustments, adjustable
ramp up rates, minimum/maximum speed limits for pump motors. Adjustments to be
password protected.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 160
SPECIFICATIONS
l.
Man/Auto select switch via keypad, with locking via password in both positions (see
Note).
m. Local/Remote selector switch via keypad with locking via password in both positions (see
Note).
n. Drive Ready with remote signal.
o. Stop and start pushbuttons via keypad, in remote mode.
p. Speed control: Local/Remote/Automatic via keypad.
q. Motor speed indication via LED display.
r. Motor On/Off indication via LED display.
s. Emergency stop pushbutton, local at controller and local to plant.
t. Drive status and failure diagnostic feature via LED display. Feature to log, time and date
the last 30 fault conditions.
u. Indication of output to drive current on each phase.
v. Isolated I/O control signals.
w.
Motor multi-function protection, providing short circuit (51), overvoltage (59),

undervoltage (27), thermal (49), stalling (49S) and phase unbalance (46)
protections, complete with ground fault (51G) protection device to trip the
incoming
supply.
x. Bolted and shrouded bolted type terminals for terminating load cables.
y. Weidmuller or Wieland type terminal blocks shall be provided to connection of external
wiring and cables.
z. Interposing relays as required.
aa. 110V AC control voltage or manufacturers standard.
bb. Microprocessor based electronic self-diagnostics and fault detection system.
cc.
Each cubicle shall be provided with an earthing bus, complete with two
connectors for connecting to the plant earthing system. Drilled holes shall be provided for
connecting cable earth conductor.
dd. VFD controllers shall be provided with a lamacoid engraved nameplate, minimum size
150mm x 75mm, engraving details to be provided by Purchaser.
In Man mode, two modes shall be functional: Local or Remote. In Local mode,
motor shall be started from Start/Stop pushbuttons via controllers keypad. In
Remote mode, motor shall be started from pushbutton station located near
motor (if required).
9.2.2.3 Performance
The VFD shall have the following features as a minimum:
a. Minimum efficiency of 97% at maximum load and speed.
b. Minimum line side displacement power factor of 0.95 to 1.0 logging at all speeds
loads.
and
c. Adjustable motor frequency of 0 to 400 Hz.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 161
SPECIFICATIONS
d. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps from 0 to 999 seconds.
e. Rotating motor restart feature.
f. Capable of running without a motor connected for set-up and testing.
g. Skip frequency rejects point to prevent operating of the equipment at a
resonant speed.
h. Ride through for power outage of at least 2 seconds duration
i. Load loss detection
j. Overload protection
k. Auto economizer
l. The flying start feature operable with or without encoder feedback
9.2.2.4 Discrete Operation
Inputs
- Start
- Stop
Outputs
a. Ready to start
b. Running
c. VFD general fault alarm status
d. VFD Auto and Man/Local/Remote operation status
9.2.2.5 Analog Operation
Inputs
Speed control signal
Outputs
- Speed signal feedback
- Phase currents (percent)
- Frequency (percent)
9.2.2.6 Verification of Interface
Vendor shall demonstrate functional testing and operational verification of the control
interface with the Building Management System via Modbus, Bacnet, LON, or equal as
required.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 162
SPECIFICATIONS
10 CABLES AND WIRING
10.1 General
Unless otherwise specified all wires and cables enclosed in conduits or trunking or
the like, shall be single core PVC insulated 450 / 750V grade and the installation
shall be carried out on the looping-in system with continuous mains throughout each
circuit. All connections to fittings and the like shall be of a solid nature and small
connectors (other than porcelain enclosed heavy brass sleeves) will not be allowed.
Porcelain connectors enclosing heavy brass sleeves shall be provided for heat
resisting trails for enclosed fittings and for the drops for pendant type fittings.
All connections to flexible cords or cables shall be such that any strain on the cord or cable
is not transmitted to the connections.
All wires/cables connections to switches, socket, circuit breaker etc. shall be carried out
using suitable swivel lugs or cable ends.
Joints in the wiring cables will not be allowed in any part of the system
The number of cables run in conduits shall be in accordance with the IEC wiring
regulations and DEWA Regulations. With the exception of 3 phase power points or sub
main supply circuits to 3 phase boards the circuits grouped in any one conduit shall be
connected to one phase of the system only. This does not apply to wiring run in metal
trunking.
All switch wires for lighting circuits shall be on the 'live' side.
When drawing the wires and cables into the conduits or trunking, the Contractor must see
that proper appliances are used so that the wires and cables suffer no damage whatever in
the process. All kinks must be rigidly avoided and care must be taken to ensure that the
insulation, taping and brading of the cables receive no damage or abrasion.
During the progress of work or at completion, the engineer may require certain wires and
cables to be drawn out in order to test that the conditions mentioned have been complied
with. They may require that certain fittings and/or accessories be dismantled for
examination of workmanship and quality.
The final subcircuit connection and wiring shall be carried out in accordance with DEWA
regulations and unless otherwise indicated, the following details shall apply throughout the
works : (Refer Clause 4.8 for type of cables).
a.
Lighting Circuits up to 1000 Watts:

2
10 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 2.5 mm (PVC) cables.

b.
Lighting Circuits 1100 to 1800 watts:

2
amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 2.5 mm (PVC) cables.

c.
13 amp socket outlets:

2
20 amp MCB protection on radial main basis wired with 3 x 4 mm PVC cable
shall be provided for upto four socket outlets serving one room only of less than
50 Sq. meters floor area.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 163
SPECIFICATIONS
2
32 amp MCB protection on ring main basis wired with 4 x 4mm and 2 x 4mm
PVC cables shall be provided for maximum 8 nos. 13 A sockets.
d.
Fan coil units each :

2
15 amp MCB protection wired with 2 x 4mm and 1 x 4mm PVC cables.
e.
Hand dryers:
2
20 amp MCB protection Wired with 2 x 4mm and 1 x 4mm (2Kw rating) PVC
cables.
f.
All apparatus over 1500VA shall be connected to individual circuits.

The above details for connections shall apply throughout the Works, except
where the related Regulations would be contravened in respect of
permissible
voltage drop. In such cases the contractor shall utilize a larger
conductor size as appropriate.
g.
Power supply to be provided to all the equipment via suitable outlets as

indicated on the drawings.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 164
SPECIFICATIONS
10.2 Temporary Wiring
No part of the new installations shall be connected temporarily to the Supply Authority's
mains without the approval of the Engineer and the Authority.
All temporary lighting and electric wiring which the Contractor may require, must be
provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for all charges for electricity consumed
as stated in the Contract conditions.
Temporary wiring and connections executed by the contractor to the instructions of the
Engineer shall be arranged in accordance with the IEE regulations. Where the ambient air
temperature is in excess of 50 deg. C. heat resisting silicon rubber cables shall be used for
temporary connection. Where such cables may be subject to mechanical damage they
shall be protected by conduit.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 165
SPECIFICATIONS
10.3 Cable
All cables supplied and installed shall be selected from the following types with stranded
copper conductors and shall comply with the appropriate British Standard referred to below
as applicable.
a.
Thermo Plastic (PVC) insulated wiring cables

non-armoured 450/750V grade
BS. 6491.
Thermo Plastic (PVC) insulated steel wire

armoured PVC sheathed cables 600/1000V grade
BS. 6346.
XLPE insulated steel wire armoured PVC sheathed

multi-core cables 600/ 1000 V grade.
BS. 5467.
d.
LS ZH (LSF) cables
BS. 6724.
e.
Fire resistant cables
BS.4066
Part-1
IEC 332
f.
Flexible cables
b.
c.
i.
ii.
single core Thermoplastic (PVC) insulated

non sheathed cables.
BS. 6004.
cables for wiring of luminaries
BS. 4533.
g.
Fire Proof Cables
BS 5750
h.
Control cables XLPE and LSF insulated 600 / 1000V BS 5467
BS 6346 /
BS 6724
Cable specification and manufacture must be consistent throughout each wired system. All
cable utilized must be continuously run from source to termination, without any through
jointing included.
Cable must be adequately stored and protected from damage pending installation and also
during installation until permanent protection is effected.
Cable reels must be supported on purpose formed support frames and under no
circumstance shall cable be drawn from reels laid on the ground. This shall be strictly
enforced as the Engineer's condemnation of any cable that is considered to have been
abused will involve total replacement at cost to the Contractor.
The cross sectional area of every cable shall be suitable for carrying the maximum
sustained load current under normal conditions and shall be selected in accordance with
related regulations. The cross sectional area of the neutral conductor for 3-phase circuits
shall be equal to the cross sectional area of the phase conductors. The cables shall be
selected such that the drop in voltage from the origin of the installation to any point in the
installation does not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying
the full load current, but disregarding starting conditions. Voltage drop calculation shall be
submitted for approval and the cross sectional area of the cable shall be increased
accordingly if required to meet the above mentioned requirement without any extra cost.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 166
SPECIFICATIONS
The cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, cross sectional area, length and
disposition and be arranged so as to carry substantially equal load currents.
Where cables are to be connected to bus bars, breakers etc. The insulation and/or sheath
shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and replaced by suitable
heat-resisting insulation.
The wire armor of single core cables in the same circuit shall be bounded together at both
ends.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 167
SPECIFICATIONS
10.4 Cable installation
10.4.1 General
The installation of cables shall conform to IEC regulations and TCVN requirements.
All cables shall be protected against any risk of mechanical damage to which they may be
liable in normal conditions, of service. Where cables are installed under floors or in
ceiling voids, they shall be run so that they are not liable to be damaged by contact with
the floor or the ceiling or their fixings.
Where the cables passes through holes in metal work, care shall be taken to prevent
abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.
All cables rising through floors and trench covers shall be protected, for example, by a
length of lead or steel or PVC pipe which should project at least 75mm above the finished
surface level. The open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a suitable compound. Lead
and PVC pipes shall be used where they will be free from mechanical damage or in
situations where steel pipe would be subject to corrosion.
The cables installed throughout the system shall be enclosed in conduit, duct, ducting or
trunking as specified.
All cables buried in the ground shall incorporate an armour and all cables installed in
positions which may be exposed to direct sunlight shall be supported by heavy duty cable
tray and shall be suitably covered by a standard ventilated stand and non perforated
cover to protect from ultra-violet light.
Cable ties shall be utilized to fix cables into cable trays, cable separator and cable
retainer shall be utilized to fix cables into cable trunking.
All conduits, ducting and trunking shall be properly supported and of a type suitable for
any type of mechanical damage to which they may be liable in normal conditions of
service or adequately protected against such damage. The internal radius of every bend
of a non-flexible cable shall be as recommended by manufacturer and the related
standards.
Cables under roads, and where deemed necessary under pipe tracks etc., shall be
protected by concrete encased PVC ducts. Bitumen bonded fibre ducts shall not be used
under any circumstances. Conduit buried in trenches or in the ground is not permitted.
Where existing cable sleeves are to be utilized, the contractor shall ensure that the lower
most ducts are employed, thereby leaving any remaining ducts accessible for future use.
Cable ducts shall be sealed at both ends using materials that are not soluble in
hydrocarbons, and that are resistant to any likely corrosive and insect attack in the area
concerned.
10.4.2 Fire Barriers
Where conduit, ducting and/or trunking pass through fire-resistant structural elements
such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall be sealed
according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance. In addition to this external fire
barrier, an internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of
fires.
10.4.3 Cables Installed Underground
Direct buried cables shall be bedded in 75mm of clean sand or riddled soil, covered with
similar material, then protected by concrete slabbing or interlocking tiles. The trench shall
08 March 2012
P a g e | 168
SPECIFICATIONS
be backfilled over a plastic identification tape laid for as detailed under cable and cable
trench marking.
Prefabricated concrete troughs or preformed trenches in which cables are laid shall be
filled with clean sand to provide the top layer of cables with a minimum of 75mm cover, or
be completely filled with sand if this should be required by circumstances.
Prefabricated cable troughs, partly or wholly filled with sand shall be closed using
prefabricated concrete covers. Such covers shall be provided, by the contractor, to meet
any particular load bearing requirements but shall not be less than adequate for use as a
footpath.
Preformed trenches shall be sand filled and closed by floating over with concrete of
adequate strength and thickness.
The use of chequer plating and other materials for closing cable troughs, trenches etc.,
shall be confined to those conditions where such special treatment is fully justified
technically and economically and shall be agreed by the Engineer.
Power cables operating at voltages of 400 volts and above shall not be routed below
'jacked-up' typed unfixed flooring systems in any internal area unless unavoidable for the
purpose of supplying equipment installed on the flooring system. In such cases the
power cables must be totally enclosed within a steel trunking, conduit, etc., over their
entire route length below the flooring system irrespective of the type of cable used.
Cable trench and prefabricated trough depths should not normally have less than 500mm.
Direct buried cables should not normally have less than 500mm of cover from cable to
finished grade level. The above shall be varied according to the requirements of actual
site conditions and cable routes to provide adequate safeguard against, for example,
erosion, soft ground conditions and mechanical damage etc. The maximum thickness of
any one group of cables shall not exceed 75mm unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.
Cable entries to buildings shall be properly sealed. Known manufacturers seals shall be
used, e.g. Brattberg, Roxtec, Hauff-Technik or similar quality and approved by
Client/Consultant. Openings in foundations are designed for the purpose.
10.4.4 Cables Sheath of external Cables
All cables directly buried in external areas should have MDPE (medium density
polyethylene) outer sheath where ever specified. Other characteristics of external cables
shall be similar to XLPE insulated cables.
10.4.5 Cables and Cables Trench Marking
All cables shall be fitted with indestructible identification bands at each end and then over
their entire length at 30 meter intervals, at all points where they enter and leave ducts,
and at changes in direction, etc.
Concrete or slabs covering cable trenches shall be colored for identification purposes.
Similarly where cables run under floors, markers shall be employed to clearly define the
extent of the cable way over the entire route.
The route of underground electric cables shall be marked by permanent markers posts.
They shall be reinforced concrete units fitted with lead inserts bearing cable sizes and
references. The marker post shall extent above ground level or shall be flush with the final
08 March 2012
P a g e | 169
SPECIFICATIONS
ground level according to the site and Engineer's requirements. Two or more markers
shall be visible from any point on the route and markers shall be placed at any divergence
from the straight.
The location of all underground power cables shall be clearly identifiable throughout their
route length by means of a polyethylene board laid in the ground at 300mm above each
cable. The board shall be colored red and continuously marked, with black indelible
lettering of not less than 12mm high, to read the following message in both Arabic and
English:
"CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE 300 mm BELOW"
A sample of the polyethylene board shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior
to any cable laying works being carried out.
The cable trench as shown on the drawings between service block and main building
cable termination room shall be decided taking into consideration of laying all cables
within the trench in 3 or 4 layers on cable ladders with sufficient access space. The
crossing of other services through the trench must also be considered while deciding the
exact width and depth.
10.4.6 Jointing and Terminations
All cable conductors shall be fitted with a correctly sized cable socket or thimble and a
means of identification. The cable sockets may be of the sweated or crimped
compression types. If for the former the solder should have a melting point of not less
than 185 deg. C and if for the latter they must be the appropriate tools as specified by the
manufacturers of the joint connectors. The cable terminations shall be made following the
positive identification of the conductors in accordance with the specified phase rotation
sequence.
Joints in cable are not allowed and shall not be carried out without the written approval of
the Engineer. Low tension cable joints shall incorporate compression type ferrules with
polyethylene tape insulation housed in a plastic joint box and sealed with cold pouring
resin fitting.
10.4.7 Flexible Fire Resistance Cables (Fire Alarm + Central Emergency System)
Fire resistant cable shall have stranded (if installed in conduits within slab) installed plain
annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 with extruded silicone rubber insulation to BS
6899 and Aluminum / LSF laminate and LSF composite sheath with tinned copper circuit
protective conductor. The cable shall be manufactured and tested to BS 7629.1993. The
conductors shall be solid if installed externally on any surface, and clipped directly.
The cables shall be rated at 300 / 500V and shall be suitable for operation at sheath
temperature of 70 deg. C.
The cable shall comply with the flame retardant requirements of BS 4066: Part 1, and the
requirements of BS 6387, category CWZ latest BS 5839 and IEC-332. The cable shall be
LSZH type.
The Fire resistant cables shall be used for the wiring of Fire Alarm System and
Emergency Lighting System and to be laid in conduits through slab or wall.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 170
SPECIFICATIONS

08 March 2012
P a g e | 171
SPECIFICATIONS
10.5 Cables types

The following type of cables shall be used for wiring, whether mentioned in schedules /
schematic or not:
Use PVC wiring cables for lighting circuits, power circuits, Computer room, Hub rooms,
Control rooms, etc.
Use PVC cable for all thermo setting (XLPE) armoured cables.
Use fire proof cables for life safety systems, smoke fans, firemen elevators, smoke blinders
and DBs / panels feeding such systems.
11 CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES
11.1 Conduits and Accessories
All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unless otherwise specified
shall be extra heavy wall black PVC and shall conform to BS 4607. All exposed
conduits shall be heavy gauge, welded, screwed and galvanized steel in accordance
with BS 4508.
PVC Conduits shall be black of the extra heavy wall with 1.8mm minimum thickness for
20mm dia conduit.
Steel conduits shall be of the heavy gauge galvanized steel, welded and screwed type zinc
coated, hot dipped galvanized both inside and outside.
All set, fixing and wood screws used throughout the installation shall be brass.
Accessories mounting box shall be provided with brass earth terminal and shall be supplied
with adjustable steel grids.
Conduit boxes for steel conduit systems shall be malleable iron with screwed spout outlets,
blind cover fixing holes, galvanized and water proof with external lugs where required.
Each steel conduit thread shall be given a coat of aluminium paint upon completion of
conduit installation.
All circular PVC boxes where used to support lighting fittings shall be provided with steel
insert clips.
The sizes of the conduits for all wiring shall be in accordance to IEE regulations and DEWA
Standards and shall be such that a cable can be withdrawn and another drawn in without
disturbing the remainder. However, the size of the conduit shall not be less than 20mm
where used for lighting and power circuits and 25mm for telephone / data wiring.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 172
SPECIFICATIONS
11.2 Flexible GI Conduits
PVC sheathed and watertight Flexible metal conduits, shall be provided between the
conduit system and electrical motors or other apparatus subject to vibration. They shall
be complete with brass double female adaptors and will be soldered to either end of all
flexible conduits and connected to solid conduit entries using smooth bore male brass
bushes.
Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate earth continuity
conductor, sized in accordance with BS Standards. The brass adaptor specified above
shall be drilled so that the earth wire can be brought out at each end. The earth wire shall
be soldered at each end to the brass adaptors or alternatively connected to a substantial
earth terminal.
11.2.1 Standards for Metal Flexible Conduit
BS EN 50086-2-3:1996
Specification for conduit systems for cable management.
Particular requirements Flexible conduit systems
BS731-1:1952,
adaptors for the
Confirmed on 15 March 1993 Flexible steel conduit for

cable protection and flexible steel tubing to enclose
flexible drives. Flexible steel conduit and
protection of electric cable.
11.2.2 Flexible conduit

The flexible conduit shall be black in colour and shall be manufactured with pregalvanized sheet steel inner core and uPVC oversheath. The inner core steel shall have a
thickness of 0.35mm and the uPVC coating shall have a 0.25mm thickness.
The conduit shall have an ingress protection rating of 55. It shall also have a resistance to
tensile forces of 2400 Newtons and a mechanical tensile strength of 1500 Newtons.
All glands and accessories shall be manufactured from brass with nickel coating.
25mm PVC coated GI flexible conduit shall be provided to connect the cable containment
system to the raised floor box.
The flexible conduits shall be glanded at both ends by using nicked coated brass glands.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 173
SPECIFICATIONS
11.3 Conduit installation
All joints in PVC conduits, other than screwed joints, shall be cemented with a waterproof
adhesive. This adhesive shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
Screwed connections between steel conduits and accessories shall be screwed up tight,
where coupled by a socket the conduit ends shall butt together; running joints shall be
provided with back nuts which shall be screwed up tight.
PVC conduits shall be saddled at a minimum of 1 meter intervals. All saddles, tubes and
boxes must be in perfect alignment to avoid any appearance of warping when the
installation is complete. Saddles should not be so tight as to prevent expansion of the
conduit.
Steel conduits run on the surface shall be secured with galvanized saddles spaced not
more than 2 meters apart.
All saddles for steel conduits shall be of the distance type. Spacer bar type saddles will
NOT be permitted.
All ceiling boxes concealed in ceiling slabs or voids above false ceilings shall finish flush
with the underside of the ceiling and all necessary extension or break joint rings shall be
provided and fitted.
Steel conduits which finish at boxes or other equipment without smooth bore spouts shall
be fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore
of the conduit. The junction shall be made by means of a male to female threaded socket
bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the
box a hexagon smooth bore male bush.
Plain or inspection elbows, or tees, will not be permitted and the number and position of
boxes and sizes of conduits shall be arranged to permit the cable being drawn-in easily
after all conduits have been erected. Stock bends below 38 mm diameter will not be
allowed; all such bends shall be formed out of the conduit at Site to suit the local
conditions. Sets and bends shall be made without indentation and the bore shall remain
full and free throughout.
Conduits shall not be run closer than 0.15m to any steam or hot water pipes and shall be
run underneath such pipes rather than over them. The conduits shall not be run closer
than 0.05m to any telephone, bell or other signaling circuit.
No wiring or drawn-in wires, cables or wires of any description are to be drawn into the
conduits until the section of the conduit system involved is complete.
A separate conduit and wiring system is to be provided for each installation i.e. lighting
general purpose sockets, power, telephone, etc.
Drawn-in boxes must be provided to give access to all conduit for the drawing-in or out of
any cable after the installation is completed and should not be spaced more than 9m on
straight runs. On runs with not more than two right angle bends the spacing between drawin boxes shall not exceed 7m.
Not more than two right angle bends shall be installed between boxes. Conduits shall not
be laid to falls, but the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure that no pockets are formed
within the conduit system in which water can collect. Drainage holes shall not be provided.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 174
SPECIFICATIONS
In floors which are in direct contact with the earth or under which unheated foundation
voids are situated, conduits shall not be laid to form traps in which moisture can collect.
Where it is impossible to arrange for drainage to a lower level such floors shall be avoided
altogether and the conduit shall be run in the floor above with drops to socket outlets and
other low level points.
Embedded conduits shall be fixed in position by crumpets or such other means of fixing as
shall be necessary to ensure that they remain rigidly in structure or finishes.
Where steel conduits enter sheet steel wiring trunking, iron clad gear or junction or similar
boxes, the junction shall be made by means of a flanged coupling with lead washer bearing
on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the box a
hexagon smooth bore brass male bush of heavy pattern.
Where PVC conduits connects to any sheet steel wiring trunking, steel clad switchgear and
the like, these shall be connected to the PVC conduit system with female thread to plain
push-in adaptors with a male bush or with male thread to plain push-in adaptors with
locking ring as may be required.
Steel conduits which do not finish at boxes with smooth radiused inside spouts shall be
fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore of
the conduit.
Where conduits cross a building expansion joint due allowance shall be made in the design
of the run with an approved expansion joint.
All screwed joints for conduits and fittings erected in the open air, damp situations and
plant room shall be made water-tight by the application of a suitable metallic paint and
conduit boxes being fitted with rubber gasket. Separate earth continuity conductors will be
installed within the normal circuit wiring.
The conduit system shall be such that 'cross-overs' are reduced to a minimum and runs
shall be located to avoid holes in the floor slabs required for other services.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that no grout or other foreign materials enters the
conduit system through joints, or through surface openings. Screw holes in boxes must be
kept entirely free and clean. After screeding, compressed air is to be blown through the
conduit system to ensure that it is clean and a steel draw wire of adequate size to be pulled
through to ascertain that no obstruction is adhering to the inside of the conduits.
Draw wires shall be left in all conduit runs for other services not included in the contract.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 175
SPECIFICATIONS
11.4 General wiring trunking
Cable trunking, ducting and fittings should comply with BS 4678 Standards. All cable
trunking accessories such as bends, tees, cable retainer, cable separators, reducer and
support shall be supplied from the manufacturers standard product range. Site fabricated
accessories shall not be acceptable.
Cable trunking shall be of sheet steel fabrication, galvanized to with heavy protection both
inside and outside. The access plate of the trunking shall be removable in easily-handled
sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar sections or other similar
approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the various sections of
the trunking.
All fixings shall be so arranged that there are no projecting screw threads or similar points
within the trunking which may cause damage to the cables. The section of the trunking
shall not be so changed at deviations from the straight as to decrease the cross- sectional
area.
Positive continuity links shall be supplied and fixed at all trunking section interconnection
points.
Cable trunking shall not be installed to expose to other mechanical stress except the loads
associated in carrying cables.
Spacing of supports for cable trunking shall be as recommended by the standards,
supports shall be positioned within 300 mm of each bend or fittings.
A calculation for the space factor shall be forwarded for approval and the trunking shall be
sized accordingly.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 176
SPECIFICATIONS
11.5 Cable Trays
The Cable support system shall be complete with all necessary sizes and necessary
accessories like Support Bracket, Profile Clamps, Joints, Couplings, Bends, End Covers,
Fittings etc. required for the installation.
The Cable support system shall be Hot Dip Galvanized Steel according to SS-EN-ISO
1461 specifications including all internal surfaces. The cable support system shall be so
designed to carry a load of not less than 70 Kgs. / meter with a support spacing of 1200
mm .The thickness of the sheet steel shall be a minimum of 1 Metric Gauge for all sizes.
The reinforcement of the Tray shall be by the hexagonal profile of the Tray supporting the
rungs. Cable widths to be as indicated by manufacturer and allowing for 10 to 15 % spare
capacity for future additional cables.
The Cable Trays should have a high resistance against Ultra Violet radiation of the sun.
The Cable Trays shall be connected to each other in such a way that the electrical earth
connectivity is continuously maintained.
Where cables enter and leave Cable Trays, the Electrical contractor shall ensure that no
sharp edges are carrying the weight of the cables or that cables subjected to any vibration
are in a position where they could be affected by sharp edges .
The Cable Trays may either be run horizontally and supported from the ceiling, or
cantilever wall brackets or supported directly on top of cantilever brackets or mounted
vertically as required. Fixing will such that there will be no perceptible deflection on the
Tray when all cables are in position. A safety factor of 1.6 shall be considered during
design of the Tray such that, with an uniformly distributed load of 120 Kg. / m, the Tray can
take a point load of 100 Kg. at a middle span without deformation.
Where Cable trays / Trays pass through walls of a specific fire resistance, the electrical
contractor shall conform according to the Local Fire Regulation Norms.
The various accessories shall be of the same material as that of the Cable Tray.
11.5.1 Submittals
11.5.1.1 Product Data for each component.
11.5.1.2 Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, fittings etc. to
complete the system.
11.5.1.3 Co-ordination drawings, showing accurately scaled Cable lay-out and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.
11.5.1.4 Maintenance data for cable, for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manual. include
detailed manufacturers instruction on tightening connections .
11.5.2 Quality Assurance
11.5.2.1 5.2.1 The manufacturer should have a long and proven record conforming to ISO 9001
standards.
11.5.2.2 Listing and labelling: Provide products specified that are listed and labelled.
11.5.2.3 Single Source responsibility: All Cable Tray components shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
11.5.3 Sequencing & Scheduling
Co-ordinate layout and installation of CableTray/ Tray with other installations.
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions
08 March 2012
P a g e | 177
SPECIFICATIONS
and as approved by the Engineer.
11.5.4 Materials and Finishes
11.5.4.1 Conform to SS-EN ISO 1461 Metallic Cable Tray Systems Cable Trays, fittings and
accessories : Steel, hot dip galvanized after fabrication conforming to SS-EN ISO 1461.
11.5.4.2 A multistage, stringently controlled pretreatment process (including degreasing rinsing
-pickling - rinsing fluxing - drying, etc.) to be carried out prior to hot dip galvanizing, to
ensure a very high quality of the galvanized product and to obtain the specified micron
thickness of zinc.
11.5.4.3 Protect steel hardware against corrosion by galvanizing conforming to SS-EN ISO 1461
11.5.4.4 Fabricate Cable Tray products with rounded edges and smooth surfaces.
11.5.5 Cable Tray / Tray Accessories
11.5.5.1 Fittings: Tees, Crosses, Risers, Elbows and other fittings as indicated, same
manufactured as the Cable Tray and shall be specifically designed for the type of
system
used.
11.5.5.2 Cable Tray supports and connectors, as recommended by the manufacturer.
11.5.6 Source Quality Control
Perform design and production tests according to ISO 9001 Standards.
11.5.7 Execution
11.5.7.1 EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to receive Cable Tray for compliance with installation tolerance and
other required conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
11.5.7.2 METHODS
Use cable Tray of indicated type and sizes, complete with manufacturers recommended
covers, barrier strips, dropouts, fittings, blind-ends etc.
11.5.8 Installation
Install Cable Tray level according to manufacturers written instructions, rough-in
drawings, the original design, and reference standards.
Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable Trays.
Fasten cable Tray supports securely to the building structure
a.
Locate and install supports according to recommendations of manufacturer.
b.
Design supports, including fastenings to the structure, to carry the greater of the
calculated load multiplied by a safety factor of 2, or the calculated load plus 100
Kgs.
Make connections to the equipment with flanged fittings fastened to the Tray and to the
equipment. Support the Tray independent of fittings. Do not carry the weight of the Tray
on the equipment enclosure.
Make changes in direction using Couplings and joints.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 178
SPECIFICATIONS
Make Cable Tray connections using Joints - External & Internal as the case may be.
Locate Cable Tray above piping.
Working Space: Install cable trays / Trays with sufficient space to permit access for
installing cables.
11.5.9 Grounding
Connect cable Trays to ground as instructed by manufacturer. Tighten bolts on
connectors and terminals, according to equipment manufacturers published torque
tightening values for equipment connectors as per standards. Ensure that there is no
possibility of discontinuity at the joints.
11.5.10 Field Quality Control
Grounding: Test cable Trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding
connections
11.5.11 Protection
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
to ensure that the cable Tray is without damage or deterioration to galvanized finishes
with zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.
12 Lighting
12.1 Lighting Equipment, General Requirements
Complete manufacturers data shall be supplied along with the proposal of luminaries.
Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures shall be as called for on plans by designated
symbols and type. Said equipment shall embody the highest standards of electrical and
mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
Furnish and install a full complement of all types of incandescent and discharge lamps
required in the fixtures installed throughout the complex.
All hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting
this equipment in place, shall be furnished from the standard manufacturer's product range
and shall be erected in place under this Section.
Contractor shall protect all opening edge in gypsum false ceiling by a protection means to
engineers approval.
Each lighting fixture shall have a manufacturer's label affixed to it and shall comply with the
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
Fixtures shall be wired with approved fixture wire. Each fixture shall be wired to a single
point with adequate slack for proper connections.
All fixtures shall be protected from damage during the installation and any broken fixtures,
globes, sockets, stems, and the like, shall be replaced with new parts, without additional
cost of the Employer.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 179
SPECIFICATIONS
The right to select other fixtures of the same quality, without additional cost to the Employer
is reserved by the Engineer regarding the shape of the lighting luminaire.
All lighting fixture shop drawings, cuts, etc., shall be complied and submitted in bound
brochures. All loose pages, sheets, clippings, etc., will not be accepted. Catalogue cuts
shall contain sufficient data to evaluate all properties of the fixtures submitted. If requested
a sample of proposal fixture shall be submitted.
The supply to lighting fittings mounted on or recessed into a false ceiling shall be effected
by means of a ceiling rose on a conduit box within the false ceiling space with a three core
heat resisting flexible cable connection. When fixtures are surface mounted to the ceiling,
Ceiling rose to be provided adjacent to the fitting. In plasterboard ceiling areas, ceiling rose
to be installed and supported next to the luminaire with a backbox to terminate the flexible
conduit from the conduit box within slab at high level.
All prismatic controllers for fluorescent fittings shall be of the injection moulded acrylic type
to obviate discoloration. Plastic diffusers will not be accepted.
Contractor shall be responsible to provide lighting calculation and to achieve following
lighting lux levels as indicated in section 1 Functional Description.
Lighting of entrances, corridors and inside the berths shall be switched centrally from
switch panels near the main entrance doors of each berth. These switch panel shall be
provided with a glass protection window. The switches inside shall be visible with clearly
indicated the function of the switches (push buttons) and the status with LED indication
lights.
The switch panel glass front window shall be provided with a lock.
Sanitary rooms and storage areas shall be switched by means of movement sensors.
Technical areas shall be switched near each entrance door.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 180
SPECIFICATIONS
12.2 Evacuation and Emergency Lighting

12.2.1 General
The Emergency and Evacuation lighting system and all its components shall be designed
& installed to meet the local Fire Fighting Authority requirements & the respective
EN50171 & BS standards and regulations applicable on the project. The product shall
bear CE certification for electromagnetic compatibility.
12.2.2 Evacuation lighting
Evacuation lighting shall fulfill the following functions:
Illuminate the escape routes.

Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, firefighting equipment and other life saving equipment on
the premises are illuminated.
Evacuation lights shall be equipped with built-in batteries for 3 hours operation as per
TCVN Standards.
12.2.3 Emergency (safety) lighting
Emergency (safety) lighting shall be installed in Outfitting Building and shall fulfill the
following functions:
Provide during power failure minimal 30 % of the required normal illumination at the
areas:
o the berths at 5 meters from floor without a ship inside,
o auxiliary workshops.
Emergency Lights shall be connected to central UPS system (Uninterruptable Power

Supply) using latest smart technology. Autonomy time of the UPS shall be minimum 30
minutes, input voltage 380V AC.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 181
SPECIFICATIONS
Sub Station Panels
The substations shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of 30 deg.
C. The substations shall be located based on the requirements of the lighting loads and
optimizing the field wiring. All substations shall be connected to the Central panel using
fire proof power cables.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 182
SPECIFICATIONS
12.3 External Lighting

Furnish and install external lighting fittings of the types specified and in the positions
indicated on the drawings. Check all requirements regarding conduit runs and positions
and the casting in of conduit.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the installation and wiring of the external
lighting installation as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the schedule of light
fittings.
External lighting shall be switched automatically by means of photocell (day light sensors)
and time switch or manually.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 183
SPECIFICATIONS
12.4 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS
Lighting fittings shall be in accordance with lighting fittings list.
Notes:
a. Ballast shall be low loss, low noise type, high frequency energy saving.
b. All external luminaires must be suitable to operate at 50C ambient and must
be anti-corrosive.
c. All lamps shall be Triphosphere type in general. The lumen output shall be the
highest available in that category from the proposed manufacturers range.
d. All fluorescent lamps shall have a minimum colour temperature of above
6000K triphosphour type.
e. Samples shall be submitted as per request.
f. The submittal should have 1 set of original catalogue. Catalogue and copies
shall be highlighted.
g. The successful bidder to confirm the quantities from drawings.
13 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
13.1 General
13.1.1 Introduction
This document defines the services and supplies necessary for the installation of a
standardized data cabling system to EIA / TIA Standards, CENELEC and ISO 11801
Class E with a fibre backbone.
The characteristics of the cabling system must allow for the widest range of protocols,
and support all applications up to and including IEEE 802.x (Gigabit- Ethernet)
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing conduiting and cable tray and trunking
system including Telephone Wiring, all to EITC approval.
The Contractor shall liaise with Local Telephone Dept. to ensure that cable entry ducts
and internal conduit/trunking tray installations are approved prior to carrying out the
installation work.
All external cable ducts, manholes and draw-pits shall be of a size and specification that
is approved by EITC.
JRC12 manholes to be constructed by Contractor based on EITC requirements.
Complete installation including wiring, backbone cable sizes etc. shall meet EITC
requirements.
Risers shall be provided as shown on drawings including, cabinets, terminal, riser cables,
etc.
Riser cable shall be provided as per requirement of EITC.
Contractor to submit the detailed shop drawing to EITC prior to carrying out any work at
site.
13.2 Standards and Regulations
The installation must comply with the laws and standards in force at the time. In particular:
EITC requirements
Local regulations or codes of practice shall be followed at all times.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 184
SPECIFICATIONS
The contractor shall be certain that all installation work areas are secure and made safe in
accordance with local Health and Safety regulations.
The Contractor should take the following standards into account:
ISO/IEC 11801
Information technology Generic cabling for customer premises
ISO/IEC/TR3 8802-1
Information technology Telecommunications and information
exchange between systems local and metropolitan area
networks Specific requirements Part 1 Overview of Local Area
Network Standards
ISO/IEC/8802-3
Information technology Telecommunications and information
exchange between systems local and metropolitan area
networks Specific requirements Part 3 Carrier sense multiple
access with collision detection access method and physical layer
specifications
ISO/IEC 61935-1
Generic specification for the testing of generic cabling in
accordance with ISO/IEC 11801 Part 1: Installed cabling
IEC 60364-1
Electrical installation of buildings - Part 1: Scope, object and
fundamental principles
IEC 60950
Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical
business equipment
EN50173
Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises
EN50174-1
Information technology Cabling Installation. Specification and
quality assurance.
EN50174-2
Information technology Cabling Installation. Installation planning
practices inside buildings
ANSI/TIA/EIA568
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
ANSI/TIA/EIA569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
TIA/EIA TSB-72
Centralized Optical Fibre Cabling Guidelines
TIA/EIA TSB-75
Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open Offices
The Contractor will have to take account of all addendums and the
new standards which could come into affect during the progress of
the design and installation.
13.3 Responsibilities of the Contractor
The successful contractor will need to include all essential work in the estimate to ensure
the completion of the project to specification and on time. On completion, the contractor will
provide final cabling documentation which will include:
a.
Site plans to include the identifications and locations of nodes, pathways, cables,
termination points, closures, patch panels, protection devices;
b.
As-built information to include nodal, route and cable connectivity, closures (in a
schematic or report based format);
c.
Installed cabling acceptance test records;
d.
Evidence of conformance to the installation specification from cabling installer or
main contractor;
e.
Handover certification;
f.
Earthing and equipotential bonding details.
The contractor will ensure that they have all relevant information before tendering. A lack
of precision in the plans and specification of the installation cannot be used as an excuse
not to complete the installation in full working order.
13.4 Scope of Work
Supply and install complete end-to-end structured cabling system with all
08 March 2012
P a g e | 185
SPECIFICATIONS
accessories for transport of data, video and voice / IP telephony signals through the
network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk, workstation
and other locations as indicated on the drawings and described herein.
Supply and installation of MDF / MDT, IDFs / IDT, CPs and ACPs as indicated on the
drawings and described herein.
Wiring, terminations and patch panels between these designated demarcation points and
telecommunication outlets as indicated on the drawings.
Supply and installation of all telecommunication outlets as indicated on the drawings and
as specified herein.
The system shall utilize a network of fiber optic backbone cables, UTP Cat-6 horizontal
cables, tie, etc. as indicated on the drawings and described herein.
The backbone shall be a ring structure with multi tube for future extensions. Crossings in
the backbone ring are not required.
Outlets for wireless shall be provided in office building, reception and canteen.
All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations.
13.5 Implementation
13.5.1 Conformance of the Installation to Specification
The contractor shall:
Install all the cable plant in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines and relevant
specifications
Ensure all the steps have been taken to ensure that the terminal equipment can be
installed to specification and mount any equipment or electronics as close to the wiring wall
fields (if appropriate) as possible, taking into consideration future growth, to facilitate
administration and service.
Provide a test report to ensure that the cabling meets the required specification (Class E):
Ensure that the patch cables or cross connections must have the same impedance
characteristics as the cable.
Not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the same conduit,
channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.
Ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the cables are not exceeded at any time
during the placement of the facilities.
Use correct cable basket or tray work as required.
Use appropriate installation equipment, specified by the equipment manufacturer, or
equivalent, to install all cables, panels, TOs and patch cords
Plug conduits and entrance holes where the cabling has been installed by the installation
contractor in the main equipment room, manholes, riser and other cable entrance locations
08 March 2012
P a g e | 186
SPECIFICATIONS
with re-unutterable duct seal or flame retardant putty.
Provide an approved ground at all newly installed distribution frames and other locations
insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The contractor shall also be responsible
for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures,
cabinets, service boxes and framework. All grounds shall consist of appropriate gauge
copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and bonded to the
main electrical ground.
13.5.2 Installation Handover
The documentation supplied during handing over shall include component acceptance
test documentation. Such documentation includes:
Evidence of conformance of cables, connectors, cable assemblies etc.
Cable acceptance test records and other information;
Cable assembly acceptance test records and other information;
Delivery information (e.g. dates of receipt and batch numbers or other unique product
identifiers of cables and accessories).
13.5.3 System Tests
All permanent links shall be tested. Acceptance is in accordance with standard ISO11801:
The horizontal copper cabling system must be tested in accordance with the procedure
described below. Tests shall be performed using a level II field tester as defined in ISO /
IEC 11801 - an automatic tester or scanner. The following parameters of the link shall be
verified:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Headroom report (The worst-case margin for a parameter determined by the

selected standard (this may be NEXT, ACR, PSNEXT, or another measurement.)
Wire map
Resistance
Link length
Insertion loss
Return loss
Near end crosstalk (NEXT)
Power sum near end crosstalk (PSNEXT)
Equal level far end crosstalk (ELFEXT)
Power sum equal level far end crosstalk (PSELFEXT)
Attenuation to crosstalk ratio (ACR)
Power sum attenuation to crosstalk ratio (PS ACR)
Delay Skew
Impedance
DC loop resistance
The insertion loss of fibre permanent links shall be tested using either a light source and
power meter or an OTDR. Tests shall be performed at either 850nm and/or 1300nm.
When tests are conducted using a power meter and stabilized light source, testing in one
direction is sufficient. When tests are conducted using an OTDR, testing in both directions
is required. In both cases, 100% of installed links shall be tested.
The following shall also be confirmed:
Continuity
The link length does not exceed the authorized maximum value,
08 March 2012
P a g e | 187
SPECIFICATIONS
instructions
-
Radius of curvature of the cables conforms to values in the design guide

Cable preparation and the assembly of the jacks is to the manufacturers
Cable ties and confinement are tight enough without squeezing the cable
The insulation of the copper wires is continuous
The earthing and bonding of all metallic pathway systems is undertaken according
to the installation specification.
The metal racking, distribution panels and patch panels are bonded at both
ends
The metal continuity of the farms of the same distributor is carried out.
The screens of the cables (where applicable) are connected to earth at both
ends
The main earthing and bonding is to EN 50174-1
All cables and cords, distribution frames and outlet locations must be labelled according
to Industry standards. Labels should be computer generated or typewritten.
13.5.4 Final Cable Documentation
On completion, the contractor shall provide final cabling documentation which shall
include:
a. Site plans to include the identifications and locations of nodes, pathways, cables,
termination points, closures, patch panels, protection devices;
b. As-built information to include nodal, route and cable connectivity, closures (in a
schematic or report based format);
c. Installed cabling acceptance test records;
d. Evidence of conformance to the installation specification from cabling installer or main
contractor;
e. Handover certification;
f. Earthing and equipotential bonding details.
13.5.5 Final Sign Off
After the probation period of 1 year, the installer shall carry out any new acceptance tests
and demonstrate the conformance to specification of the system and hand over the final
report.
The sign off of this report will constitute the transfer of responsibility for the new
installation and the starting point of the contractual guarantee.
If there remain minor imperfections, they must be rectified in a time mutually agreed
between the owner and the installer.
If required the installer will provide staff training for the owner on care and maintenance of
the system
13.6 Warranty
All workmanship and cabling must be warrantied against manufacturing defects for a
minimum of one year, depending on local law.
A 25 year manufacturers warranty on the passive cabling system, including the sockets,
cable, outlets, patch panels and patchcords must be available.
13.7 System Requirements
13.7.1 General Organization
The proposed solution must be the latest available technology for the structured cabling
system.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 188
SPECIFICATIONS
The contractor shall install complete end-to-end UTP Cat 6 structured cabling system
solution as detailed in the following sections.
Wherever the standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO) are not ratified, the latest "Draft" shall be
referred.
Wherever applicable, the latest version of EITC Design
Telecommunications Infrastructure for New Building shall be referred.
Guidelines
for
All components pertaining to structured cabling system shall be supplied from single
manufacturer and mixing of components from different manufacturers shall not be
accepted.
Telecommunications system installation shall also meet EITC requirements. Contractor to
obtain approval on drawings from Local Authorities.
The system offered is of star topology and will consist of any or all of the following:
a. Campus distributor (CD);
b. Campus backbone cable;
c. Building distributor (BD);
d. Building backbone cable;
e. Floor distributor (FD);
f. Horizontal cable; consolidation point (CP);
g. Consolidation point cable (CP cable)
h. Multi-user telecommunications outlet (MUTO);
i. Telecommunications outlet (TO).
The proposed system shall support analogue and digital applications, data, local
area network, IP telephony and video on a common platform including Ethernet,
Token Ring, Fast Ethernet, 100BaseT, 100VGAnyLAN, ATM at 155Mbps and
transmission speeds of 622Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet.
The MDFs / IDFs cabinet shall provide a controlled environment to house
telecommunications equipment, connecting hardware and to terminate the entire
horizontal cabling and backbone cabling. These cabinets shall be of high quality
and include locking doors. The cabinet shall be either wall mounted (with access
from back and front Swing type frame) or freestanding (with wheels) depending
on the size of the cabinet. The wall mount cabinet should have a minimum depth of
500mm and the freestanding cabinet shall have a minimum depth of 600mm.
Provide sufficient space in the cabinet for telecommunications/network equipment
and future expansion. The cabinet shall be supplied with Fan Tray and UK type
powerstrip. These cabinets shall be supplied with sufficient quantities of cable
organisers for management/dressing of patch cords.
13.7.2 Principles
The system design conforms to ISO 11801 and EN 50173-1 Class E, .EIA / TIA
standards.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 189
SPECIFICATIONS
The MDF shall be installed in industry standard 19" cabinet as indicated in the drawings.
MDT sand fiber optic campus distributor shall be provided as shown on drawings.
Locations of IDF (Floor distribution) shall be as shown on drawings. The IDF shall
constitute of RJ45 patch panel housed in industry standard 19 cabinet.
The contractor shall also supply patch cords and line cords to complete the end-to-end
UTP Cat - 6 cabling system.
Core multimode fiber optic cables shall be installed between MDTs and IDFs /IDTs, in
each floor.
Cat 3 cables shall be provided in addition to FO cables for voice applications as shown
on schematic.
13.7.3 Fibre backbone
Cables supplied for the backbone should have LSZH jacket. The capacity of the cable will
depend on the traffic expected, with a minimum of 12 fibres for IP, telephony, video and
other data applications.
13.7.4 Horizontal Copper Cable
The horizontal cable runs from the floor distributor (IDF) to the telecommunications outlet
(TO) RJ45.
Locations of the IDFs as shown on drawings.
13.7.5 Building Distributor
The backbone cabling subsystem extends from the main distributor to the IDFs, located
in the Main equipment room (MER). The subsystem includes:
a. Any cabling components within the building entrance facilities;
b. Jumpers and patch cords in the campus distributor;
13.7.6 Floor Distributor
Floor distributor shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
Equipment for Floor Distributors
- 19 Cabinet.
- 19 panel for RJ-45 (capacity of 16, 24, 32, or 48) outlets.
- 19 panels for voice / data outlets.
- 19 panel equipped for fibre connectors
The rack or cabinet will be equipped with:
- Support for the 19 format
- Patchcord and cable management
- Fibre management systems for the backbone fibre
Organization and function:
Where required panel and patchcord identification should be made by using coloured port
identification and/or coloured patchcords.
Group patchpanels by function (telephony, data, fibre, copper)
08 March 2012
P a g e | 190
SPECIFICATIONS
Racks should have patchcord management sections at the side.

13.7.7 Grounding
Grounding shall be as per manufacturers requirements.
13.7.8 Identification of Location
Locations will be identified in the plans and drawings. Cable chart and schedule shall be
submitted and followed during the installation.
A unique identifier must identify each patch panel. The patch panels and RJ 45 outlets
must have identifiers associated with each port. During installation the cables should be
identified at both ends.
13.8 Component Specifications
Depending on the products used, the cabling system meets all the performance
requirements of the existing and known forthcoming national and international cabling
standards up to and including Class E link and Category 6 hardware (ISO / IEC 11801 /
EIA / TIA and EN 50173) requirements.
13.8.1 Copper Connectors
The copper jacks must comply with EN 60603-7 and EN 28877 and be of the insulation
displacement type. They must be capable of terminating 0.50 to 0.65 solid and 7 x 0,15 to
0,20 mm stranded wires.
The jacks have the following features:
- Tool less assembly
- Capable of being wired to both 568B and 568A
- Flexible cable entry
- UTP, versions as specified.
- Category 6
- Integral shutter
The jacks have the following performance:
- Lead-through resistance 17 m < Resistance <20 m
- Insulation resistance > 10 M
- Maximum diameter of the wire sheath 1,60mm
- Cat 6 (at 250MHz)
ii. Attenuation < 0.3dB
iii. Return loss >= 16dB
iv. NEXT >=47.5dB
13.8.2 Fibre Connectors
The fibre connectors must comply with IEC 61754
The fibre socket must have the following features:
a. Small form factor connector
b. Duplex
c. High density
d. Field terminated in under two minutes
08 March 2012
P a g e | 191
SPECIFICATIONS
e. Integral shutter for dust protection and optical safety
f. Plastic body parts
The connection should have the following typical performance:
Insertion (dB)
Loss
Return (dB)
1300nm
Loss
62.5/125
Mean
Limit
850nm
.3
<=.75
.2
<=.75
850nm
27
>=20
1300nm
29
>=20
50/125
Mean
.19
.29
33
33
Limit
<=.75
<=.75
>=20
>=20
The connection should comply with the following mechanical and environmental tests:
PARAMETER
TIA/EIA
Fiber
Optic
Test
Procedure
ICE
61300 Series
Test Method
3-4
171
Attenuation
SEVERITY
PERFORMANCE
n/a
0,75dB max,
0.3dB typical
107
3-6
n/a
>20db
Mating
Durability
21
2-2
500 Cycles
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
2-12
8 drops
1,5m
at
Impact
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
90degrees,
0,5kg
100cycles
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
2,5
revolutions,
15N
0,75dB
>20dB RL
max,
-10C,
96
Hours,
Sample
functioning
0,75dB
max,
>20dB RL0,3dB
change
Return Loss
Plug
Cable
Retention/Side
Pull
Strength
Coupling
Cold
2-4
185
2-6
33N
90
of
Plug
Cable
Flexing
Plug
Twist
66N
at
degree
6,6N at
degree
Cable
36
188

n/a
2-5
2-17
08 March 2012
P a g e | 192
SPECIFICATIONS
Heat
Humidity
Thermal
Cycling
Vibration
nla
n/a
2-18
2-19
2-22
2-1
+60C
14
days, Sample
functioning
0,75dB
>20dB RL
+40C,
9095%RH,
96 Hours
0,75dB
max,
>20dB RL0,4dB
change
-10C to +60C
5 cycles
0,75dB
max,
>20dB RL
0,3dB change
10-55Hz,
30min
each
axis
max,
0,3dB change
13.8.3 Wall Outlets and TOs (RJ45)

Wall outlets must be available to suit the local needs with at least two keystone jacks or
sockets, either two fibre, two copper or one of each. The wall outlets should be fully
shuttered. Fibre outlets must have cable strain relief, store at least 1m of slack fibre and
ensure that the fibre minimum bend radius is not exceeded. The copper outlets must be
capable of being flush mounted. The fibre outlets must have minimal protrusion. Wall
outlets must have space for visibly labelling each jack or socket
13.8.4 Patch Panels
19 panels must be available to take a minimum of 24 copper jacks or 24 duplex fibre
connections per 1U. Other connection densities must be available
Copper: 16, 24, 48 per panel
Fibre: 24, 48, 72 per panel
The panels will be designed for fitting of the jacks / sockets
The copper panels will have cable management and tie down points (where required) for
copper cable.
The fibre panels will have cable management, fibre management and slack storage for
fibre cables and ensure that the minimum bend radius is not exceeded
Fibre panels must be able to manage a range of cable sizes from 2 fibre units to 96 fibre
cables. They must be sliding or front loading to ensure easy access to the fibre.
Panels must have the facility to label each socket / jack.
Coloured identifiers should be available in at least 4 colours to allow visible identification
of jacks / sockets.
Blanking plugs for unused ports must be available to suit the patch panel colour.
13.8.5 Patchcord Organization
1U Patchcord management panels should have a minimum of 5 rings to accommodate up
to 72 patchcords.
13.8.6 Patch Cables
Patch cables must be available in LSZH jackets.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 193
SPECIFICATIONS
100 Ohm RJ-45 copper patchcords shall be Category 6. The EMC level should also
match for UTP cables UTP patchcords should be use, for shielded systems shielded
patchcords should be used.
The copper patchcords must be made from stranded wires for full flexibility. They must
comply with ISO 11801. The patchcords must be available in a range of lengths to facility
easy patchcord management.
The fibre patchcords must be made from duplex ruggedised cable. The fibre core and
cladding sizes must be of the same nominal value as the cable to ensure lowest channel
loss. The plugs on the ends must be appropriate for those on the permanent link and on
the active equipment.
The following connectors must be available as patchcords or hybrid patchcords: VF-45,
ST, SC, LC, MT-RJ. The patchcords must be available in a range of lengths to facility
easy patchcord management.
13.8.7 Copper Cable

Copper cable will be 100 Ohm impedance. The cable will be UTP category 6 to match the
system specification. The cables will be available in 4 pair.
The cable shall have the following performance:
Cable performance category 6 UTP

08 March 2012
P a g e | 194
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency
(MHz/100m)
(dB/100m)
Insertion
Loss
(db/100M)
Insertion
Loss
db/100M
NEXT
(db/100
M)
PS-NEXT
(db/100M)
ELFEXT
(db/100M)
RL (db)
2.0
74.3
67.8
64.8
20.0
3.8
63.3
55.8
52.8
23.0
5.3
58.8
49.7
46.7
24.5
10
6.0
57.3
47.8
44.8
25.0
16
7.6
54.2
43.7
40.7
25.0
20
8.5
52.8
41.8
38.8
25.0
25
9.5
51.3
39.9
36.8
24.3
31.25
10.7
49.9
37.9
34.9
23.6
62.5
15.4
45.4
31.9
28.9
21.5
100
19.8
42.3
27.8
24.8
20.1
200155
25.2
39.4
24.0
21.0
18.8
200
29.0
37.8
21.8
18.8
18.0
250
32.8
36.3
19.8
16.8
17.3
Electrical characteristics at 20 C
Conductor resistance at 20 C (max.)
Dielectric strength at
Insulation resistance
Velocity (nom.)
Characteristic impedance
(100 to 250 MHz)
Mutual capacitance
Propagation delay skew
External diameter of the sheath
98,6 /km
50 Hz 1 kV/1min
(min.) 5000 M/km
66%
100 +/-15 (1 to 100 MHz) 100 +/- 18
<55 pF/m nom.
<20 ns/100m
6.4 mm (nom)
13.9 Fibre Cable

Optical Fibre cable should be available with 50/125 fibre and single mode options. Cable
must be available for indoor use and indoor/outdoor use for campus backbones. Rodent
resistant cable and armoured must be available for use where required.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 195
SPECIFICATIONS
The cable should have the correct number of pairs appropriate for the position of the cable
in the network. For horizontal cabling two pairs of fibres should be available, for backbone
and campus networks cable sizes up to 96 fibres should be available. Individual fibres must
be capable of being easily identified by colour coding.
The multimode cable must operate at both 850nm and 1300nm with the following minimum
performance. The fibre must be suitable for operation according to IEEE 802.3z (Gigabit
Ethernet) on distances exceeding 500m at 1300nm.
Optical Performance of the cable:
- Single mode cable (1310/1550nm): 0,7/0.7dB/km
- 62,5/125m cable (850/1300nm): 3,5/1,0dB/km
Mechanical Performance:
- Cable minimum bend radius
- Indoor cable: 20 times cable diameter, during installation and 10 times cable
diameter, after installation.
- Indoor/outdoor: 25 times cable diameter, during installation and 20 times cable
diameter, after installation.
- Minimum bend radius in the TO: 20mm
- Operating temperature range: -10 to +60 degrees C
- Rated LSZH
13.10 Active Components

The active components shall be provided by the specialist as per the demands of various
integrated systems video requirements and actual usage and should be the latest
available. The proposed active component shall be acceptable to EITC meeting all
requirements.
The computers on the networks shall have switched 1 GB connections over Cat-6 / FO
cables. All active components shall be in compliance with IEEE 802.3u specifications, with
24 high speed ports and minimum two GBIC 1000 base uplinks per stack.
The active components shall be interconnected to a Backbone Switch/stack (FO campus
distributor). The Backbone Switch shall be in compliance with IEEE 802.3ab (Gigabit
Ethernet) specifications. The number of ports on the Backbone Switch shall be able to
serve all the Edge Switches/stacks and a minimum of 4 servers via 1000 Base T
Besides the above specifications, the switches shall have the following special features:
- Industry standard IEEE 802.1Q VLAN support
- IEEE 802.1P Class of Service
- Trunking of multiple Gigabit and Fast Ethernet links
- In-band Management of switch - SNMP and Web based
- Out-band Management of switch Telnet
14 LIGHTNING AND EARTHING
14.1 General
Lightning system shall be provided for all building. Lightning protection system shall comply
with TCVN46-2007 Standard and EN-IEC 62305-1 type LPL 3 Standard.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 196
SPECIFICATIONS
Use conventional Lightning protection system for each Building. The system shall include
air terminals and lightning grid (air termination network). Lightning down conductors shall
connect the air termination grid with earthing grid around each Building, the minimum
distance between two down conductors shall not be more than 20m, dimension of each
lightning grid on the roof shall be not bigger than 10x10m for total area, each down
conductor shall be connected with earth electrode system, as shown on drawings.
Earth test points shall be provided. The down conductors shall be rigidly fixed, bending with
radius less than 20cm shall not be used.
Earth resistance for lightning protection shall not be higher than 1 Ohm because the earth
electrodes shall be combined with electrical earth system.
14.1.1 Air termination network
Air termination network include air terminals and lightning grid installed on the proof.
The air terminal and lightning grid is to intercept lightning discharges and down leader to
ground by all down conductors system around building to enable the safe transfer of
energy to ground.
Air terminations are made of copper rod. They are 16mm, 600mm high. All air
terminations shall be installed at highest point of the roof and at crossing points of
lightning grid on roof as shown on drawings.
Lightning grid is made of copper bars 25x3mm, lightning grid shall be fixed at 1m
intervals, using DC tape clips, to the building roof. Lightning band shall be installed at
edge of the roof as shown on drawings.
Items of roof-mounted plant shall be bonded to the air termination network via same
copper tapes. All exposed metalwork on the roof or the structure shall also be securely
bonded to the air termination network. A bimetal clamp shall be used to bind different
metal.
14.1.2 Down conductor
The lightning down conductors shall be also 25x3mm copper tape and installed around
building with distance between two down-conductors less or equal to 20m, in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and shall not be subject to bends of less than 0.5
meters radius, as shown on drawings.
The down-conductor shall be secured to the structure by metallic fastenings as approved
by the Project Manager at least every 1 meter.
14.1.3 Earthing and bonding
Once the energy is conducted to ground level, a low impedance ground is essential to
dissipate the lightning energy into the earth mass as effectively as possible. The earthing
system shall consist of:
-
Ground Rod by steel clad copper 20mm x 3m long as shown on the drawings.
Bare Copper Cable 70mm2 (without substation in building) or 185mm (with substation in
building) or 300mm (main substation in building) to connect steel clad copper rods
together.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 197
SPECIFICATIONS
-
Exothermic Welds (Cadweld) for welding ground rod and bare copper cable. The
connection process shall satisfy IEEE 80 - 1989 (Grounding) and IEC 837 - 1989
(Connectors).
Grounding Enhancement Material shall be used as considered necessary by the supplier.
An approved earth pit shall be used to connect the down conductor to the earthing
system.
The resistance value of the earth termination system shall be 1 Ohms or less.
Where concrete columns are used as building vertical structure, the down conductors
shall be 2 Nos. 16mm dia Re-bars (By Civil Contractor), which shall be welded at each
Lap / Joints. Continuity shall be checked and recorded after each weld.
All aluminium panels of cladding should also be connected to the down conductors.
25 x 3mm copper tape shall be provided between floor and cladding at intervals as shown
on drawings.
Rebar to earth tape connectors shall be used at roof, substation, handrails, etc as
required for bonding.
70 mm thermoplastic (PVC) cable shall be used for connecting rebar to the rebar to
tape connector.
The rebar down conductor shall be connected to the raft slab and pile cap for grounding.
Earthing net of ground rods made of steel clad copper 20mm x 3m long as shown on
the drawings shall be provided. Copper tape 25x3mm shall be installed within the floor
slab (by building Contractor).
The Concrete pile also shall be used as earth electrode.
Rebars with pile (2 Nos.) shall be welded on piles associated with building perimeter
columns and unwelded at all other piles.
Contractor should also include in his scope inspection by manufacturers authorized
representative to ensure correct installation.
All metal work on or around the building must be bonded to the lightning protection
network to avoid side flashing.
Where it is necessary to form tape to tape joints, they shall be tinned soldered and
riveted. Soldering alone will not be accepted. Clamped or bolted joints will only be
accepted at test points and for connection of down conductors to earth rods.
All materials used throughout the installation shall be either copper or copper based
components which are corrosion resistant and compatible with the application.
The Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawing for the air termination network,
down conductors, earth termination network and bonding and shall be responsible to
provide all the necessary accessories to integrate the system with the architectural finish
of the building.
14.1.4 Interface Test clamp
The Contractor shall supply and install interface test clamps on all down-conductors for
test resistance measurement of Lightning system.
All interface test clamp shall be installed at 1m to ground.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 198
SPECIFICATIONS
Interface test clamp shall be made of copper plates connecting down-conductors and
earth rod system.
14.1.5 Testing
Testing shall be done as required by TCVN 46-2007.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 199
SPECIFICATIONS
14.2 Electronic System Surge Protection

Electronic system surge protection shall be used for the Incoming Main Power Supply :
A suitable protection should be installed in the main LV MDBs.
The ESP shall be connected in parallel with the supply. ESP should be installed within the
LV MDB by the panel assembler.
HRC Fuses shall be provided in the connecting leads as required by the Specialist.
ESP to have neutral earth warning light, to detect if there is excessive voltage present
between neutral and earth.
Protection shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of:
BS6651 : 1999 Protection of Structures against lightning (Appendix C).
BS2914 :1972 Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power
circuits.
IEEE C62.41 1991 Recommended practice on surge voltage in low voltage AC
Power circuits.
The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system normal operation. It should not:
Corrupt the normal mains power supply.
Break or shutdown the power supply during operation.
Have an excessive earth leakage current.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10 KA (8 / 20
microsecond waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth,
neutral to earth).
The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600 volts.
For protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in
accordance with BS 6651 : 1999 Category B High (6kV 1.2 / 50mircorsecond open
circuit voltage, 3kA 8 / 20 microsecond short circuit current).
This peak transient let through voltage shall not exceed for all combinations of
conductors:
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth.
Neutral to earth.
Mains protectors (installed in shunt / parallel) should have continuous indication of its
protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per
phase.
Full protection present.
Reduced protection replacement required.
No protection failure of protector.
The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of
conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit
08 March 2012
P a g e | 200
SPECIFICATIONS
between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time). This should include early
warning of excessive neutral to earth voltage.
The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
Protection for Data Communication and Telephone lines
Transient overvoltage protectors shall be installed on all data communication / signal /
telephone lines entering or leaving the building, in order to protect equipment connected
to the line, against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines travel between buildings
linking equipment in each building, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at
both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment).
Protectors shall conform to BS 6651: 1992 Protection of structures against lightning
(Appendix C) CCITT LX K17
The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not:
Restrict the system bandwidth or signal frequency.
Introduce excessive inline resistance.
Cause signal reflections or impendence mismatches (on high frequency systems).
The protector will have a low transient let through voltage for tests conducted in
accordance with BS 6651 : 1992 Category C High (5kV 10/700 microsecond est).
This let through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors:
Signal line to signal line.
Signal line to screen / earth.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.
The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturers.
The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers
of protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
15
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM
15.1 Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System and Voice Evacuation System
15.1.1 General
The contractor shall supply and install a complete fire alarm system as described herein
and as shown on the plans to be wired, connected and left in good operating condition.
The system shall include Analogue Addressable main control panel and voice command
centre, Repeater panel, Addressable smoke sensors, heat sensors, line powered
isolators, alarm indicating appliances, wiring, termination, electrical boxes, and all other
necessary material for a complete operating system.
An online printer must be provided to print out all Alarm and trouble events.
Each and all items of the fire alarm system including the amplifiers and loudspeakers
shall be listed as products of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturing under the
appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories lc (UL) and shall bear the UL label. All
control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial
08 March 2012
P a g e | 201
SPECIFICATIONS
listing shall not be acceptable. All control equipment must have transient protection
devices to comply with UL864 requirements.
The complete installation shall confirm to the applicable sections of NFPA-72. NFPA-71
and Electrical codes.
The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating
sequences as necessary. The system shall be capable of storing, and downloading while
the system is in operation, a second set of operating software resident in the control
panels as backup in case primary operating software is corrupted. In addition, the system
shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate
changes in operation. All software operation shall be stored in a non-volatile
programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary
power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.
Full flexibility for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing,
NOTing timing and special coded operations shall also be incorporated in the resident
software programming of the system.
Resident software shall allow for full configuration of initiating circuits so that additional
hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes in, for instance, sensing of
normally open contact devices to sensing of normally closed contact devices or from
sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing a combination of current limited and
non current limited devices on the same circuit.
The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in
chronological order for the purpose of creating an event history of 600 events.
The system shall incorporate single channel two-way voice communication and tone
generating capabilities.
The control panel voice command center shall be equipped with master telephone for two
way voice combination with remote phones. Fire fighter's phone jacks shall be provided at
remote locations as shown in the drawings. 4 nos pluggable phone shall be provided in
the voice command center. The phone shall be ruggedly constructed of a thermal ABS
material like Red Cycolac, type T. A five foot coiled line cord and jack shall be attached to
each phone.
Alarm indicating application shall operate selectively by building / floors as called for in
the sequence of operation. Any subsequent zone alarm after silencing of initial condition
shall reactivate all the alarm indicating application.
The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an alarm verification operation
whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation.
If within one minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other
smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described in the sequence of
operation. If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system shall resume normal
operation. The Alarm verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other
08 March 2012
P a g e | 202
SPECIFICATIONS
activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The Alarm verification
operation shall be selectable by zone.
A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the alarm indicating appliances
without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should a true alarm occur,
all alarm functions shall be in service conditions including the time of each occurrence.
The system shall have a single key that will allow the operator to display all alarm,
troubles, and supervisory service conditions including the time of each occurrence.
The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for
maintenance or testing purposes.
The system batteries shall be supervised for disabling and enabling all circuits individually
for maintenance or testing purposes.
The panels shall be capable of networking upto 99 more nodes as nodes as and when
required without modification of hardware except adding network cards.
Detectors shall be provided in floor voids as required as per standards. Wherever the
ceiling void exceed 825mm detector with remote indicator shall be provided without
variation.
In open areas isolators shall be provided for every 20 detectors or detectors in each fire
zone.
15.2
Sequence of Operation
Upon actuation of any manual station, or automatic detector or sprinkler flow switch, or air
conditioning and ventilation duct return and exhaust air smoke detector. The system is to
operate as follows:
On the Main Panel, the local panels and the annunciator (repeater) panels the green
normal LED is to extinguish and the red alarm LED is to light. An audible signal is to
sound. Visually indicate on the LCD control panel label of the addressable device or
circuit of alarm initiation. The first line is to display the user specified message indicating
the floor and zone that initiated. The first line is to display the user specification message
indicating the floor and zone that initiated the alarm. The second line of the LCD is to
indicating real time, number of messages waiting, type of alarm, zone of alarm and time
the alarm occurred. Red LED corresponding to the zone in alarm in the main panel shall
also be lit.
The alarm indictors on the MFAC and repeater panel to continue to flash until the alarm is
acknowledged. If a subsequent alarm is received after acknowledgment, the alarm is to
sound again. The operator is to acknowledge the alarm by pressing a dedicated button
and the buzzer is to silence provided that isn't an additional alarms the operator is to
acknowledge all pending alarms before the buzzer is to silence. To silence audible to
resound. To reset the system the device is to be cleared first then the reset button is to be

08 March 2012
P a g e | 203
SPECIFICATIONS
pressed.
Sound evacuation alarm on floor of incidence the floor above and below. The alarm shall
consist a "slow whoop" alarm tone, for ten second followed by thirty second of an
automatic pre-recorded voice evacuation message in Arabic and English. The message is
to ask the tenants to evacuate the building. The message and tone shall repeat
continuously (unless manually silenced) until the alarm initiating device is restored to
normal and system reset. The silencing of an alarm condition is not to prevent the
resounding of alarm devices if a subsequent condition occur. A time delay feature is to be
provided to sound a general evacuation alarm automatically throughout the building if the
initiating alarm condition is not responded to within a predetermined time. Visual
indication at the panels, corresponding to activated voice alarm circuits is to illuminate.
Sound a 20 pulses per minute alarm tone in the remainder of the building for 15 seconds
followed by thirty second pre-recorded alert message in Arabic and English. The
message is to draw attention to the possibility of a fire condition that is being checked out.
The message and tone shall repeat continuously(unless manually silenced ) until the
alarm initiating device is restored to normal and system rest. The silencing of an alarm
conditions is not to prevent the resounding of alarm devices if a subsequent condition
occur.
Turn on the flashing strobes for the floor of incidence, the floor above and below.
Automatically shut down all fans serving the areas affected by the alarm condition.
Automatically start all stairwell pressurization fans.
Automatically start smoke extraction fan system
Automatically dial the firefighting authorities
Recall all elevators to ground floor. If the alarm originates from the ground floor, redirect
the elevators to the other floors or as designated by the Local Fire Department. A
common pre-recorded message is to be sounded in all seized elevators. Lifts are then to
held for the exclusive use of the fire fighter by use of a special key.
Transmit signal to radio paging system to display zone of alarm.
Printer is to print text message on the event log indicating the device which initiated a
trouble alarm, time and date associated with alarm. All follow up information regarding
this alarm, such as acknowledge, reset and the like is to be printed afterwards.
All emergency stair and exit doors will release.
15.3
Voice Communication
A central single channel digital audio control module shall be provided for the necessary
alarm message / tone generation main and remote microphone connections and mixer /
pre-amplifier circuits. Continuous supervision shall be provided along with specific
information as to the type of failure should a problem occur (e.g. Main microphone
trouble, tone trouble, etc.) Audio outputs shall have individual gain control.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 204
SPECIFICATIONS
A hand-held push-to-talk microphone shall be provided in the Voice Command Center,
recessed within a protective panel-mounted enclosure. The microphone shall be a noisecanceling communication type with a frequencing range of 200 Hz and shall be equipped
with self-winding five foot coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided for the circuits
ready for transmission. The microphone shall be supervised for disconnection.
An audio control switch- module shall be furnished to provide manual access to audio
operations for authorized personnel. The module shall include an "ALL CIRCUITS"
switch, "Aux Tone 1" which, "Aux Tone 2 switch, tone generator stop switch, "Audio
Trouble Reset" switch. These switches and associated LED indicators shall be supervised
for disarrangement or failure.
Audio power amplifiers shall be furnished with a self contained filtered 24VDC power
supply, transformer, and amplifier monitor circuits. The amplifiers shall provide a 70 Volt
RMS output with a frequency response of 120 to 12,000 Hz. Provide sufficient
amplification to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus ten (10) percent spare
capacity.
The speaker circuits shall be capable of supplying 70Volt RMS. audio power from the
system amplifiers. Supervision for open, short, or ground fault conditions shall be
provided. Individual and distinct trouble indications shall be provide for each fault. Provide
one circuit for each zone or area of distinct
communication.
Digital tones for alarm (show whoop) and auxiliary requirements (wail, horn, chime, etc.)
shall be provided.
A pre-recorded digitized voice message capability is to be provided for automatic
transmission to building occupants during alarm conditions. The automatic message
player shall not rely on a tape or other mechanical means of transmitting the evacuation
message. A standard evacuation message shall be provided under this contract,
however, the message player must be capable of transmitting a custom message of up to
five (5) minutes long. A self-contained speaker will provide testing of the message (s)
without disturbing the occupants of the facility.
The system shall be configured to allow selective voice paging. Upon activation of any
speaker manual control switch, two attention getting beeps shall sound over the speakers
indicating an impending voice message will occur.
If any speaker manual control switcher are activated, the control panel operator shall be
able to make announcements via the push-to-talk paging microphone over the preselected speakers.
Facility for total building evacuation and paging shall be provided to allow for activation of
all speakers. This shall be accomplished by the means of an" All Circuit" switch.
15.4 Power Requirements
The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system
08 March 2012
P a g e | 205
SPECIFICATIONS
upon loss of normal 230V AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24
hours with 30 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall
automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and
recharging operations shall be automatic. Contractor shall submit standby and alarm
power calculations in support of the selected battery size
All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24V DC and shall be
individually fused at the control panel.
15.5
Fire Alarm Control Panel

The control panel shall be Analogue Addressable type of adequate point capacity with
20% spare and the construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based
electronics. It shall display only those primary controls and display essential to operation
during a fire alarm condition.
A local audible device shall sound during alarm, trouble or supervisory conditions. The
audible device shall sound differently during each condition.
The following primary controls shall be visible through a front access panel:
Eighty character liquid crystal display.
Individual red system alarm LED.
Individual yellow supervisory service LED.
Silent Walktest With History Logging The system shall be capable of being tested by one
person. While in testing mode the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be
silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall
automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.
LED Supervision
All slave module LED's shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a
problem occur the LCD shall display the module and LED location number to facilitate
location of that LED.
System Trouble Reminder
Should a trouble condition be present within the system and audible trouble signal
silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals to act as
reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the
trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the owner's application.
15.6
Output
Fire Alarm control panel shall be capable of operating remote printers. It shall be also
possible to have hard wire zones, LED modules to represent the zone in the Fire panel
15.7
Multiple Addressable Peripheral Network

The system must provide communication with initiating and control devices individually.
All of these devices will be individually annunciated at the control panel. Annunciation

08 March 2012
P a g e | 206
SPECIFICATIONS
shall include the following conditions for each point.
Alarm
Trouble
Open
Short
Device missing/failed
Automatic environmental compensation.
Variable Sensitivity setting
Day 7 Night mode of operation
Automatic dirty sensor indication
All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually.
Each loop to have a minimum capacity of 250 devices with detector & control modules in
any combination. System that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are
unacceptable. Each loop to have 25% spares available. Vendor to increase the no. of
loops if required.
Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code interred on
each device at time of installation. The use of jumpers to set address will not be
acceptable due to the potential of vibration and poor contact. The system must verify that
proper type device is in place and matches the desired software configuration.
15.8
Printer
Printer shall receive English language text from the fire alarm control panel in an industry
standard ASCll format via an EIA RS-232-C connection. All printed information shall
include time and date. Printer shall be quiet in operation, with automatic paper take.
15.9 Addressable Device Types

15.9.1 General
The system control panel must be capable of communicating with the types of
addressable devices specified below. Addressable Devices will be located as shown on
the drawings. The system shall identify when a smoke sensor becomes too dirty to
operate properly. It shall also identify sensors which are almost dirty which need cleaning
before they drift beyond their selected sensitivity. In short, a review of the front panel
display or the printed status report quickly identify sensor that need cleaning.
Sensitivity of the sensor shall a programmable, photoelectric shall be variable from 0.2 to
37 percent and ionisation sensitivity from 0.5 to 1.7 percent. It shall also be possible to
programme for timed, automatic sensitivity selection such as less sensitive during working
hours and more sensitive when quite.
The panel shall provide the following features:
Individual sensitivity selection for each sensor
Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis for sensitivity selection
Automatic, once per minute individual; sensor calibration check to verify sensor
integrity
08 March 2012
P a g e | 207
SPECIFICATIONS
Display of sensitivity directly in per cent per foot

Multi-stage alarm operation
Ability to display and print detailed sensor information
Addressable Sensor Bases

The addressable sensor bases shall contain integral addressable electronics that
constantly monitor the status of the detachable photoelectric, ionization or heat sensors.
Each sensors output shall be digitized and transmitted to the control panel every four
seconds.
It shall be possible to use different sensor types with the same base. The base shall have
integral LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or trouble (steady on). The bases shall be
available with connections for remote LED alarm indicator or connections for supervised
remote replay. The sensor bases shall be size not more than 125mm diameter.
Address of the device shall be set in the base using dip switches so that removal or
replacement of the sensor head will not affect the operation of the system. Device
addressed through software or address set in the sensor head are not acceptable. Soft
addressable sensors are also will be acceptable subject to compliance with other
requirements of the specifications.
15.9.2 Addressable Sensors
The addressable sensor shall plug in unit which mounts to a twist lock base
15.9.3 Heat Sensor
The heat sensor shall be self restoring and provide a combination of rate and fixed
temperature rate compensated sensing. It shall have low termal mass to accurately and
quickly measure the local temperature at the fire alarm panel.
It shall be possible to select the rate of rise temperature detection for either 15 oF or 20
oF per minute. Fixed temperature sensing and shall be programmable to operate at 135
OF or 155 oF. It shall be possible to programme these sensors as a utility device to
monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32 oF to 120o
15.10 Photo electric sensor
Photoelectric sensor shall use a stable, pulsed infra red LED light source and a silicon
photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven
levels of sensitivity shall be available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to
3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration. It shall be possible to select and monitor the
sensitivity at the control panel.
The head be designed to allow 360 deg. Smoke entry for optimum response to smoke
from any direction. A built-in screen shall keep insects from entering the smoke chamber.
Sounders shall be provided in the base as required and shown on drawings.
15.11 Addressable Pull Station
operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system
locks. Pull stations shall be double action type requiring smashing glass and pulling a
lever to initiate an alarm.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 208
SPECIFICATIONS
The device shall integral electronics for constantly monitoring the status of the device and
communicating the same to the control panel. Address of the device shall be set by dip
switches in the associated electronics.
15.12 Control Modules
Control modules shall be provided as shown in the drawings to supervise and operate
notification appliances, speakers and telephone circuits. Output capacity shall be up to
24V DC. All control modules shall be powered from the panel via 2 core cables. Local
powering of control modules shall not be acceptable.
15.13 Monitor Modules
Supervised individually Addressable Modules shall be installed in the addressable
network for monitoring the status of lifts, etc.
These devices shall provide specific addressability to a single initiating device or multiple
devices by monitoring normally open dry contacts shall cause an alarm. An open in the
initiating circuit winng shall causes a trouble to be reported at the panel.
15.14 Line Powered Isolators
Line powered short circuit isolators shall be installed in the detection loop for every
addressable devices or as indicated in general notes on drawings.
15.15 Addressable Device Supervision
All devices shall be supervised or trouble conditions. The system control panel will be
capable of displaying the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing, failed).
Should a device fail it will not hinder the operation of other system devices.
15.16 Fire Fighter's Phone Jack
Remote phone jack station shall be recessed to the wall on a single gang box for use with
portable phones. Face plate shall be engraved "Fire Emergency Phone" The unit shall
have a call LED indicator. 4 set of fire telephone also should be provided for use.
15.17 Notification Appliances
Notification appliances shall include visible, audible or Audible / visible as shown in the
drawing. Audible appliance shall be loudspeaker or dc vibrating bells and the visible
appliance shall be strobes.
15.18 Strobes With Speaker (Single Unit)
Strobes shall be suitable for wall or ceiling mounting as shown in the drawings. Xenon
flash tubes shall be 24VDC powered from the panel. Visible output shall be 30 candela.
The reflective design shall provide light output in key axis directions allowing vertical or
horizontal mounding.
The unit shall be of red finish with white 'FIRE" lettering. Flash rate shall be 1 Hz. For
loudspeaker refer Clause 19.0.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 209
SPECIFICATIONS
15.19 Loudspeakers
Loudspeakers shall be either wall or ceiling wall or ceiling mounting type to suite the site
conditions. These shall provide high quality tone and voice reproduction. Round or square
models shall be installed, to the approval of the Engineer. Generally, wall mounted units
shall be of square type and round housing shall be constructed of high impact, flame
retardant ABS thermoplastic. All speakers shall have 70 V line transformer with tappings
at W, W, 1W and 2W. Frequency response shall be 125Hz for general signaling and
sensitivity of the speakers shall be 85dBA 1W, 10ft. All ceiling mounted speakers shall
o
have 160 dispersion angle with fire dome.

15.20 Audio / Visual Alarm Indicating Appliance
Audio / Visual units shall be provided on a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible
and visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed to accommodate either horns,
bells, chimes or speakers. The unit shall be complete with a resistant, pyramidal shaped
o
lexan lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180 . Field of view. The front panel or bezel
which is constructed of UL listed Norly, may be inverted so that the lens is below the
audible device. The lamp assembly shall incorporate a built-in reflector for more efficient
light propagation and special shock-mounding arrangement to resist bulb failure due to
vibration. Lamp shall provide 4 wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out
system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including back-box.
Audiovisual unit shall be UL listed for its intended purpose.
15.21
DC Vibrating Bells
DC vibrating bells shall be installed externally for indicating an alarm condition. Alarm
Bells shall be of red finish, 150 in diameter with a 24V DC heavy vibrating solenoid action.
Sound output shall be 90DB at 1 meter. Mounted hardware shall be available for surface,
flush and weatherproof fixings. The bells shall be installed in a weatherproof back box. As
an alternative multitone electronic sounders shall also be proposed (with similar
specification).
15.22
Graphic Command Centre

A colour graphic command center shall be installed in near the main entrance witj the
approval of the fire department. When a fire alarm status changes, colour graphics shall
display an indication of the type of alarm or other activity and its location. With proper
access code, the operator shall be able to acknowledge alarm conditions, silence audible
alarms and extinguish visible notification appliances, and perform system reset directly
from the colour graphic screens. GCC shall accommodate upto 4 network card and each
network capable of accomodating upto 99 notes.
The system shall provide history logging upto 400,000 historical events.
15.23
Beam Detector
Inside the berths are beam type detectors projected these shall be a 4-wire 24V DC
devices.
The detectors shall be listed to UL 268 and shall consist of a separate transmitter and
receiver capable of being powered separately or together
The detectors shall operate in either a short range (30' - 100') or long range (100' - 330')
mode.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 210
SPECIFICATIONS
The temperature range of the device shall be -22 degrees F to 131 degrees F.
The detectors shall feature a bank of four alignment LEDs on both the receiver and the
transmitter that are used to ensure proper alignment of unit without special tools.
Beam detectors shall feature automatic gain control which will compensate for gradual
signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses.
The units shall be both ceiling and wall mountable.
The detectors shall have the ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or magnet
activated remote test station.
15.24
Wiring
The system shall be wired using FP200 cable or approved equal. The cable size for the
2
initiating device circuit shall be 1.5mm and 2.5mm for the indicating device circuit.
15.25
Bms Integration
Fire alarm system shall be integrated with BMS for status monitoring
16 CCTV SYSTEM
16.1 General
16.1.1 Work Description
This Section specifies the minimum acceptable requirements on the quality, performance and
standard of the Close Circuit Television System.
This CCTV system shall be used IP CCTV system.
The System shall be used for general surveillance and security monitoring of factory and
designated areas.
The System shall be constructed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.

Any equipment modifications to meet the specifications shall not be acceptable.
All equipment shall be current model, no replacement problem of components.
The CCTV System shall, in addition to the compliance of minimum requirement stipulated in
this Specification and as shown on the Drawings, allow at least 20% spare on both software
and hardware facilities including a camera wiring termination panel for the future expansion.
All cabling shall be laid in conduits and/or trunking. No cabling shall be run exposed.
The CCTV system shall be equipped with multi-screened controller to view several camera
pictures on a single monitor. It shall be protected by password for accessing to the system
programming to prevent tampering and misused by unauthorized personnel.
Motion detection alarm signals shall be provided under the CCTV system for transmission to

08 March 2012
P a g e | 211
SPECIFICATIONS
the intrusion. The CCTV system shall provide whatever interfacing requirement to complete
the installation.
16.1.2 System Description
a. Control Center & Monitoring Equipment
Unless otherwise specified, the system shall be a microprocessor based system with the
following central control and monitoring housed in the control room.
o
Video keyboard controller for pan/tilt/zoom/focusing of cameras
CCTV monitor for monitoring and playback purpose
Digital Video Recorder / Network Video Recorder.
Video signals from cameras shall be recorded in the Digital video recorder. Date, time, and
the location code of the cameras shall also be recorded.
The DVR/NVR shall be able to receive alarm signals to perform automatic video recording by
appropriate alarm activation.
The control keyboard shall be provided for user interfaced, including the generating texts in
pictures by showing set up menu, video identification, alarm and control text.
The alarm management system shall detect and respond to mechanical alarms, video loss
alarms and recorded alarms. Alarm messages shall be displayed on screen by default. The
system shall provide alarm input for each camera input and triggers the DVRs alarm
recording speed when alarm input is received.
b. Field Equipment
CCTV cameras shall be installed in strategic areas where local surveillance is required as
indicated on the drawings.
CCTV cameras shall generally complete with the standard lens. Fixed type cameras with
varifocal angle lenses shall be used for indoor and outdoor applications. Speed dome (PTZ
Camera) shall be used to extend the coverage. Details shown on the Drawings are reflecting
the performance requirement. Specialist selection of proper lens to suit the location of use
and coverage shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
The exact location, installation detail and finishing for each camera housing shall match the
interior detail (where and if applicable) and subject to the approval from the Engineers. The
Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Building work and make necessary
provision for mounting of the CCTV cameras.
16.2 Specification of Equipments and Materials

a. Control console
All central hardware equipment shall be housed in a control console. This section shall
indicate the major central equipment required for the operation and control of the CCTV
System. Exact system configuration and quantity of equipment shall be as indicated on the
Drawings and as required to complete the installation.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 212
SPECIFICATIONS
b. PC & Monitor
The keyboard of PC shall be able to perform the following functions as minimum

requirements:
o
Provide full capability to display any camera to any monitor including camera
sequencing and alarm display with pre-position call up capability for pre-position
cameras.
Alarm handling depending on the number of DVRs / NVRs.
Generating text in picture by showing set up menu, video identification, alarm and
control text
DVR/NVR output with time, date number, camera description, alarm number and
description display can show in Monitor
The CCTV Monitors shall be solid state type, colour monitors (unless otherwise specified)
complete with front controls including power on-off switch, brightness, contrast, vertical and
horizontal hold.
As a general requirement, monitors shall be 42 inch (as specified) for split multi small screen
and sequence screen purpose. The exact quantity and requirements shall also be referred to
the drawings.
Each monitor shall have high resolution, minimum 550TVL display
c. Network Video Recorder
The NVR shall allow simultaneous recording and playback of video images and provide
overwrite protection of marked video clips to prevent loss of vital material.
The images per second record rate and image quality shall be selectable for each connected
camera. The NVR shall provide external alarm inputs and video motion detection operation.
Supplied Control Centre software shall allow remote viewing of live and recorded video.
Video may be archived to a PC and then recorded to a CD-ROM.
The system shall be fully compatible with any standard 10/100 Base T network making it ideal
for distributed security surveillance system. Storage arrays shall be connected to allow
expanding the storage capacity.
*General Requirements:
o
The system shall display a quick install menu the first time the unit is started to minimize
the installation startup time. When the menu is closed, the unit shall begin to record
automatically.
The system shall provide 6, 9, or 16 looped-through, auto-terminating camera inputs as

required by the application.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 213
SPECIFICATIONS
o
The system shall provide at least 320GB hard disk storage as required by the application.
The system shall record multiple camera signals while simultaneously providing live multiscreen viewing and playback.
*The system shall provide two modes of recording:

o
The first mode shall continuously record to the disk by overwriting older data around a
period of 30 days.
The second mode shall record to the disk and then provide a warning when the disk is
nearly full and will stop when the disk is full. Older recordings must then be manually
deleted.
The images per second rate and image quality shall be selectable for each connected
camera as to allow prioritization between high-risk and low risk areas of surveillance.
*Control Centre Software

o
The system shall allow for remote access software to view live video, playback pre
recorded video, and to configure the system via a network.
The system shall be capable of streaming live video to the remote PC.
The remote camera control functions provided at the Control Centre shall include pan, tilt,
and zoom of the cameras, selective video archiving and search of video by either time or
alarms.
A stand-alone software player shall be provided so that saved video recording can be
viewed outside the Control Centre remote access software.
d. CCTV Camera
Cameras shall be manufactured to give maximum performance and dependability for

indoor and outdoor applications.
The camera shall have beam and electrical focus control and be accessible without cover
removal. All other adjustments shall not be possible without cover removal.
Line lock synchronization shall be applicable for all cameras. The Contractor is
responsible to ensure all cameras can be adjusted by line lock tools, if necessary.
Each camera shall incorporate a vertical control pot that shall adjust the vertical phase on
the signal from 0 to 360. The unit shall be used to maintain the camera signals vertically
in phase so that the applications of vertical interval switching, sequential camera
scanning, Digital Video Recorders can be adopted to the system. Switching from one
camera output to another shall be crisp clean and immediate without visual disturbance
characteristics of random interface.
Camera number identification shall be integrated into the camera and a particular location
code shall be assigned for each camera. No two cameras bear the same code in the
development.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 214
SPECIFICATIONS
Fixed Type Camera
The camera shall have the following technical specifications:

When powered via 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 220 VAC, 50 or 60Hz. The vertical phase delay shall
be adjustable from 0 to 358 degrees.
The camera specified shall use a 1/3-inch format; interline transfer, CCD image
sensor.
Video output: Composite video 1.0 Vpp, 75 ohms.

Horizontal resolution: 540TVL or better
Sensitivity (scene illumination) using f/1.2 lens, 89% scene reflectance:
Color mode:
Usable picture
30 IRE: 0.30 lx (0.03 fc)
50 IRE: 0.65 lx (0.07 fc)
Full video picture: 2.6 lx (0.26 fc)
Night mode:
Usable picture
30 IRE: 0.12 lx (0.012 fc);
50 IRE: 0.26 lx (0.026 fc)
Full video picture: 1.04 lx (0.104 fc)
PAL models:
12 VDC (10.8-39 VDC)
24 VAC, 50 Hz (12-28 VAC, 45-65 Hz)
230 VAC, 50 Hz (85-265 VAC, 45-65 Hz)
Power consumption: 4 watts (without lens)
Signal-to-noise ratio: 50 dB.
AGC: 21 dB, (max).
Mechanical specifications
08 March 2012
P a g e | 215
SPECIFICATIONS
o
Video Output: BNC
Video/DC-Iris connector: 4-pin EIA-J
Camera Mount: 1/4 inch-20, top and bottom.
Lens mount: C and CS
Weight: 0.99 lb (0.45 kg
Dimensions (less lens/including connectors):

2.28 H x 2.6 W x 4.8 L inch (58 x 66 122 mm)
Power connections:
- 12 VDC and 24 VAC, 50 and 60 Hz models: Push type connectors.
- 230 VAC, 50 Hz models: 2-wire power cord with Euro plug
Environment specifications
o
Operating Temperature Range: -20 C to +50 C
Operating humidity: 5% to 93% non-condensing
Lens for fixed camera:

Image format: 1/3 inch
Vaifocal lens: 5.0-50mm, DC Iris
Lens mount: CS mount
Operating Temperature Range: -10 C to +50 C
Operating humidity: up to 93% non-condensing
Certification: CE
Speed dome (PTZ Camera)

General requirements
PTZ Color Modular Camera Systems
The camera dome will be a rugged, vandal resistant surveillance camera system that
allows upgrades by means of interchangeable CPU, communication, and hot-swap
camera modules with built-in surge protection. The camera housing will be available
in in-ceiling or indoor/outdoor pendant versions, as the application requires.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 216
SPECIFICATIONS
The dome bubble will meet stringent strength requirements able to exceed the UL
1598 horizontal impact standard for lighting fixtures. The bubble will be made of
2.6mm thick polycarbonate and be able to withstand a 100 foot-pound impact or the
equivalent of a 10 lb sledgehammer dropped from a height of 10 feet. The dome
bubble will be available in clear or tinted versions, as the application requires.
The camera dome will be available in wall mount, roof (parapet) mount, mast (pole)
mount, corner mount, pipe mount, and in-ceiling versions, as the application
requires.
The pendant camera system will be a NEMA 4X or IP66 certified, rugged, weatherresistant package.
The camera system will provide a Fast Address method to allow the camera address
number used for control to be remotely programmed from the system keyboard.
The camera system will ensure that any advanced commands required to program
the dome are accessed via three levels of password protection ranging from low to
high.
The camera system will provide a feature that automatically rotates, or pivots, the
camera to simplify tracking of a person walking directly under the camera.
The camera system will provide advanced troubleshooting and diagnostics via
diagnostic LEDs and on-screen diagnostic displays.
The camera system on-screen display menus will support English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Polish, Italian, and Dutch.
All camera domes will accept, RS232 and 485, Pelco "P" and Pelco "D" control
protocols.
An optional integral fiber optic transceiver module will also be available that will be
capable of transmitting and receiving video and Biphase signals up to 2.5 miles (4
km). The fiber optic module will be compatible with 50/125 mm, 62.5/125 mm, lowloss multimode glass fiber, rated for minimum system bandwidth of 20 MHz (video
850nm/data 1300nm).
Camera housing
Indoor Camera Housing (if applicable)

o
All indoor cameras shall be equipped with indoor housings to provide protection for the
cameras and to prevent tampering. This shall be done by equipping necessary tamper
alarm circuit which shall be connected back to the respective control console for warning
if being tampered. Tamper alarm switch and signal shall be provided for each camera.
Such camera shall be automatically displayed onto the monitor for immediate
identification
The construction of the housing shall be one piece extruded aluminum housing not less
than 1.2mm thick with key locked
Mounting bracket shall be provided for each camera and housing. Mounting brackets
shall be so manufactured to provide rigid support and to resist tampering and
environmental conditions. To facilitate durability, mounting brackets shall be constructed
of steel and aluminium, zinc plated and capable of supporting a minimum weight of 20
kgs
Proper cable entry by means of G.I flexible conduits into the cameras housing shall be
provided. Samples shall be submitted for approval

08 March 2012
P a g e | 217
SPECIFICATIONS
o
For housing inside ceiling void, maintenance access shall be co-ordinated by the
Contractor with Building work.
Outdoor Camera Housing

o
The housing shall be water-tight of an insulation rating IP65, and be manufactures to

protect the cameras from dust, water, moisture and temperature outside the ambient
limits of the cameras
The housings shall be constructed in two pieces to suit the camera; which are the
mounting base and removable housing cover. The mounting base shall be of plated steel.
The cover shall be brushed, anodised aluminium to eliminate the need for sun shroud.
Tamper alarm circuit shall be provided similarly to the indoor housing
The following shall be provided for each housing:

- Filtered Blower System thermostatically controlled to operate in all housing.
- Close Circuit Warning System tamper alarm circuit to be reported to the control
console.
Proper cable entry by means of G.I. flexible conduits into the cameras housing shall
be provided. Samples shall be submitted for approval.
17
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
17.1
Automatic Control System (Integrated Building Management System)
17.1.1 General
This section covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Factory
Automation System.
The Manufacturer shall furnish and install a fully integrated factory automation system,
incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring
and control, and subsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified.
Works shown upon the drawings and not mentioned or described in the Specification and
Works described in the Specification and not shown on the drawings will nevertheless be
held to be included in this contract and their execution is to be covered by the contract
price in the same manner as if they had been expressly shown upon the drawings and
described in the Specification.
17.1.2 Scope of Works
The contract comprises the supply, delivery to site, installation, testing, design
commissioning and maintenance of the Factory Automation System (BAS).
The scope of supply and installation shall be but not limited to the following and as per
tender drawings:
Supply and install factory automation system (BAS) complete with accessories and wiring.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 218
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply and install all necessary sensors, wiring, intelligent outstations interface/control
components for the monitoring/interfacing/alarm (Digital, analogue and alarm signals) of the
following Installations as shown in the Drawings:
i)
Mechanical Ventilation & Air Conditioning Installation (MVAC);
ii)
Cooling water Installation (Horizontal and vertical machine);
iii)
Plumbing Installation;
iv)
Air compressor Installation.
v)
Fire water service
Manufacturers of control devices shall be HONNEYWELL, JOHNSON CONTROL,
SIEMENS or similar quality and approved.
17.1.3 Quality Assurance
The BAS system shall be designed and built, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer
employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place support facility
within 100 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and necessary test and
diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing contractors are not acceptable.
The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site, experienced project manager for this work,
responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of
the BAS.
Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall
be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements.
DDC controllers shall be compliant with the European EMC Directive, Standards EN 500812 and EN 50082-2, at the Industrial Levels. Additionally the equipment shall be compliant
with the European LVD Directive and bear the CE mark in order to show compliance to both
Directives."
This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a minimum of 15
years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years. Compatibility shall
be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels to current level of technology, and
extend new field panels on a previously built network.
17.1.4 System Configuration

The BAS/IBMS shall comprise of the following basic components to form a true
"Distributed Intelligence techniques":
IBMS Server and Operator Stations shall be communicated through the Industry standard
Ethernet LAN with de-facto standard Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) running Operator Interface software. These shall be completed with sufficient
memory and performance capacity to perform all functions as called for in this
specification for access to the IBMS for command entry, data input and output display,
08 March 2012
P a g e | 219
SPECIFICATIONS
and colour graphic display unit for data input/output alarm display, review, status checking
of the system.
The proposed locations of the IBMS with equipment installed shall be as follows:
Building Control Centre with:
1 IBMS Server
1 IBMS Operator Station with 15 inch colour monitors.
1 high speed system printers for report/alarm hard copy.
1 colour inkjet printer for graphic print-out.
1 notebook PC remote Terminal for remote dial-in to the central.
. Interface Unit to third party integration.
All DDCs shall be linked to the central processing equipment via 1 Mbit (baud)
communication bus. Data transmissions between IBMS Server and the DDCs shall be in
digital form through the high speed communication network. Direct communication can
therefore be executed between each DDC and the central processing equipment; which
shall be linked up by the multiple two-wire token-passing peer communication network.
All DDCs shall be microprocessor-based, able to operate on a fully standalone and
intelligent mode. System, for which apply any form of master and slave arrangement shall
not be accepted. The DDCs shall collect and transmit all analogue and digital signals as
specified. The exact number of DDCs shall be referred to the tender drawings.
System configured with multiple layer processing cards communicating serially or
packaging two or more smaller controllers to monitor or controlling one equipment such as
Air Handling Unit shall strictly be not acceptable.
Failure of any DDC shall not render the IBMS inoperable or any degraded mode of
operation such that the DDCs are not able to communicate to the workstation through
itself.
The DDC controller should have gold capacitor for backup of RAM for 72 hours in the
event of power failure, which is environmental friendly. The use of rechargeable battery
for power back up is not allowed.
The DDC controllers shall be fully stand-alone with built-in real time clock in the event of
communication breakdown.
The DDC controllers shall be fully modular in both hardware and software.
The system shall contain error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data
integrity.
The whole BAS system shall be on emergency electrical supply.
All DDC shall have the capabilities to store alarms initiated during the failure of main
power supply. Once power is resumed, such alarms will be reported at the BAS Central.
All DDCs should have UPS for power back-up to at least 15 minutes at full load.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 220
SPECIFICATIONS
17.2 Central Hardware
17.2.1 IBMS Server
The IBMS Server shall comprise one high performance real time, digital personal
computer, rated with such application, complete with keyboard and mouse, one colour
graphic VDU, system printer(s) to log all transaction and alarm printer(s). All the
equipment shall be suitable for the power supply voltage of 230VAC +-6% 50Hz +-2%
The IBMS Server shall be located where shown on the plans and shall meet the following
minimum criteria:
a)
The IBMS Server shall meet the following minimum specification:

- Intel Pentium Pro 350 Mhz CPU
- Minimum 64MB RAM on board
- Minimum 6.3GB Hard Disk with 9ms access time or better
- 12-speed CD ROM Drive
- One (1) 3.5 1.44MB Floppy Disk Drive
- One (1) Super VGA graphic card with 1024x768 pixel resolution and 256
colours (2 MB Video RAM)
- One Cartridge Tape Drive (for data backup and archiving)
- One 150 MB 1/4 Cartridge Tape Unit (Wangtek or equal)
- One mouse and one keyboard
- Minimum of 5 expansion slots (PCI or ISA)
- One Ethernet network adaptor
b)
The IBMS Server color monitor shall be 20-inch diagonal non glare, non- better
vertical refresh rate.
c)
IBMS Server shall include all accessories needed to comply to UL requirements

for listing under the appropriate standards as specified in UL864 and UL916.
Further, all accessories shall be included to satisfy the local authorities having
jurisdiction over the system. UL listed cards (originals preferred or photocopies)
shall be provided to support the documentation that such listing is in effect.
17.2.2 Printers
The Contractor shall provide printers as specified in the schematic diagram for recording
alarms, operator transactions and system reports.
The first printer shall be assigned for trend log, summary, totalizer logging, recording
alarms and providing system reports. The second printer shall be a colour printer that
support screen graphic output and can always be configure as an alarm output printer
when the alarm log printer is out of order. Each of these printers shall be interchangeable, and shall have the following minimum characteristics:
-
Dot-Matrix Printer

08 March 2012
P a g e | 221
SPECIFICATIONS
132 column/250 character per second print speed.
24 pins dot matrix character structure switchable to 29 x 23 dot matrix for letter
quality output with 96 ASCII upper/lower case character set.
Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike, and expanded (double

width) characters capability.
Adjustable line spacing of six or eight lines per inch with compressed mode option
for 220 characters/line and bi-directional printing and logic seeking.
17.2.3 DDC Hardware Requirement

The MVAC, Fire service, air compressor, Water Plumbing Facilities as stated in the
control point schedule shall be Direct Digital controlled through a network of standard and
comprehensive Distributed Control Processors. Not more than three types of Direct
Digital Controller shall be used in the Building Management Network Architecture. The
type of DDC to use for individual facilities shall be determined by the control points density
of the facility with respect to the control zone/area. The DDCs shall have a point density
ranging from minimum 18 points up to 100 points for DDC control.
All Direct Digital Controller shall be 32 bit microprocessor based with EPROM operating
system (O.S.) to allow for faster scan and DDC cycle times, as well as capability for
applications requiring faster program operation, such as precise static pressure and
industrial applications. For chiller plant, 32 bit microprocessors shall be used to handle the
more completed chiller optimization programme. DDC programs and data files shall be
non-volatile EPROM or flash memory to allow some additions and changes. Each DDC
shall have an on-board real-time clock with battery backup of a minimum of 30 days. The
battery shall be of the non-soldered type and should be easily removable for maintenance
purposes. The DDC shall monitor the battery power and output an alarm if it falls below a
stated minimum level.
Remote DDCs shall be provided where shown or specified with capacity to accommodate
input/output (I/O) points required for the application plus spare points specified. These
panels shall be configured with analog and digital inputs and outputs, and pulse counting
totalisers and such that the primary input, the output and all control logic shall be resident
in a single microprocessor to provide network independent stand-alone closed loop DDC.
Each DDC shall be provided with a socket for a Portable Operators Terminal (POT). All
panel inputs shall be selected for the application utilizing sensor types listed under the
sensor section of this specification. DDC outputs shall be binary for On-Off control, and
true variable voltage (0-10v) for driving analog devices. Analog outputs shall have a
minimum incremental resolution of one percent of the operating range of the controlled
device.
DDCs shall be designed for complex DDC and energy management applications, peer-topeer communications with other DDCs, or optionally for coordination, management, and
data concentration for sub-networks for VAV box controllers. Each DDC shall have an
integral real-time clock for true stand-alone operation. DDCs that use software clocks are
not acceptable. Each DDC shall have a minimum of 256Kbytes of battery-backed RAM
memory, 512Kbytes of OS EPROM and 256Kbytes of data file memory.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 222
SPECIFICATIONS
Direct Digital Controller with control point density more than 40 shall be designed in such
a way that modular control point devices is provided for flexible control points
configuration and cost effective spare part replacement. Damage of a single or multiple
control points will not render the replacement of a whole DDC; instead only the faulty
control point module will be replacement.
The minimal required control point module include: Digital Input Point module, Digital
Output Point module, Analog Input Point module and Analog Output Point module. These
modules shall be able to receive and output Industrial standard signal likes SPDT, voltage
free contact, 4-20 mA and 0-10 Volt.
All DDCs shall have LEDs for continuous indication of peer bus communications, power,
and operational status. All LEDs shall be visible without opening the panel door.
All panel electronics shall be installed in suitable enclosures. Equipment room panels
shall have hinged doors and shall also contain all load relays, transducers, and
associated equipment.
The DDCs shall support the following Input Signal for monitoring:
Analog inputs of the following minimum types shall be supported:
i)
ii)
iii)
v)
4-20 mA,
0-20 mA,
0-10 volts,
2-10 volts.
DDCs shall communicate with each other and with the control PC at a minimum speed of
1 Mbps.
In addition to Proportional, Proportional-Plus-Integral (PI), and Proportional-Plus
Integral-Plus-Derivative (PID) algorithms, an HVAC enhanced Adaptive Neural PID
(ANPIC) real time auto tuning algorithm shall be provided and implemented where
specified. The ANPID shall be a full PID, but modified and enhanced to perform as
follows:
The loop performance is modeled for various loads and PID gains. The performance
results of the model are entered into the ANPID as a training function. Subsequently the
trained ANPID is applied to the loop. The ANPID then monitors the PID (error, PI and D
gains; and output) and continuously auto adjusts the final output to prevent repeating the
error learned during the training process.
Adaptive Neural PID shall be applied on all AHU and chiller optimization control as well as
in the predicting of energy consumption of all equipment basing on weather conditions,
weekday, weekend and occupancy schedules.
All DDCs shall be the fully stand alone intelligent type with peer to peer communication.
Master/slave type of controllers shall not be acceptable.
The DDCs shall have full trending facility in both graphical or tabulated format via its inbuilt LCD screen and POT (Portable Handheld Operator Terminal)
08 March 2012
P a g e | 223
SPECIFICATIONS
The DDC controller should have gold capacitor for backup of RAM for 72 hours in the
event of power failure, which is environmental friendly. The use of rechargeable battery
for power back up is not allowed.
All VAV box controllers shall be micro-processor based complete with sensors, actuators
and terminal equipment control devices.
Digital input types to be supported shall be, but not limited to, the following:
i)
ii)
Normally-open contacts.
Normally-closed contacts.
Resident DDC Software Requirement

All DDCs shall operate totally stand alone and there is no requirement of an IBMS
computer nor another master controller for all specified control applications. Software
shall include a complete operating system (O.S), communications handler, point
processing, energy management application packages as specified herein, standard
control algorithms and specific control sequences (DDC), and an owner/user custom
control and calculation package complete with interpreter.
Operating System (O.S) software shall be EPROM resident, operate in real time, provide
prioritized task scheduling, control time programs, monitor and manage DDC to DDC and
DDC to IBMS server communications, scan inputs and outputs. O.S shall also contain
built-in diagnostics functions. The built-in diagnostic's result of individual DDC shall be
capable of being output to the central workstation. This is a major requirement as it
would facilitate trouble-shooting and ensure the shortest possible down time of any failed
DDC. DDCs without such safety feature shall be provided with custom software
diagnostic resident in the EPROM.
Custom DDC programs are to be provided to meet the control strategies as called for in
the Control Sequence of Operation section of the specifications. Each DDC shall have
resident in its memory and available to the programs a full library of DDC algorithms,
intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of
control sequences. Programming package as stated in this specification shall be provided
for the custom DDC programs.
Each DDC must be able to perform the following energy management functions and be
equipped with software capability to operate on a standalone basis without a master
controller or an IBMS computer. Detail description of software features and operating
sequence of all available energy management software shall be submitted with the tender
for evaluation by the consulting engineer.
Minimum requirements of energy management software are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Time and Event programs

Holiday Scheduling
Distributed power demand
Optimum start and stop program
Night purge
Load Reset

08 March 2012
P a g e | 224
SPECIFICATIONS
g.
h.
i.
j.
Zero energy band

Duty cycle
Enthalpy analysis
Run Time Totalization
Alarm Lockout software shall be provided to prevent nuisance alarms. On initial start up of
air handler and other mechanical equipment a "timed lockout" period shall be assigned to
analog points to allow them to reach a stable condition before activating alarm
comparison logic. A "hard lockout" shall also be provided to positively lockout alarms
when equipment is turned OFF.
Run time shall be accumulated based on the status of a digital input point. It is possible to
total either ON time or OFF time. Run time counts shall be resident in non-volatile
memory and have DDC/DDC resident run time limits assignable through the operators
terminal.
An Exception Day program is to be provided to accommodate Holiday and other planned
exceptions to the normal time programs. Exception schedules shall be DDC resident and
operator programmable up to one year in advance.
The DDC shall be provided with a trend archive of at least the last 200 events ( digital
transitions or analog value changes ) of any user selected group of up to 20 points. All
events shall be stamped with the occurrences data and time. If data buffer in the DDC is
full, the oldest data shall be overwritten with new data so that the most up-to-date values
are always available. The trending display shall be available in both graphical plots or in
table forms to be displayed using a Portable Operator Terminal (POT). This DDC local
trending shall be provided in addition to the central software trending capabilities.
DDC (Direct Digital Controller)

The DDC & MVAC Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Factory Level Network
DDC & MVAC Equipment Controllers shall use the same programming language and
tools. DDC & MVAC Equipment Controllers which require different programming language
or tools on a network are not acceptable.
Chiller plant, cooling tower plant and AHUs plant controllers shall be DDC controller and
reside on Factory Level Network (Peer to Peer Communication network with speed
minimum 115 K bps)
DDC Controllers shall be a 32-bit stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital
control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors,
communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size
shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point
I/O schedule.
DDCs shall be designed for complex DDC and energy management applications, peer-topeer communications with other DDCs, or optionally for coordination, management, and
data concentration for sub-networks for VAV box controllers. Each DDC shall have an
08 March 2012
P a g e | 225
SPECIFICATIONS
integral real-time clock for true stand-alone operation. DDCs that use software clocks are
not acceptable. Each DDC shall have a minimum of 256Kbytes of battery-backed RAM
memory, 512Kbytes of OS EPROM and 256Kbytes of data file memory.
Direct Digital Controller with control point density more than 40 shall be designed in such
a way that modular control point devices is provided for flexible control points
configuration and cost effective spare part replacement. Damage of a single or multiple
control points will not render the replacement of a whole DDC; instead only the faulty
control point module will be replacement.
The minimal required control point module include: Digital Input Point module, Digital
Output Point module, Analogue Input Point module and Analogue Output Point module.
These modules shall be able to receive and output Industrial standard signal likes SPDT,
voltage free contact, 4-20 mA and 0-10 Volt.
All DDCs shall have LEDs for continuous indication of peer bus communications, power,
and operational status. All LEDs shall be visible without opening the panel door.
All panel electronics shall be installed in suitable enclosures. Equipment room panels
shall have hinged doors and shall also contain all load relays, transducers, and
associated equipment.
The DDCs shall support the following Input Signal for monitoring:
Analogue inputs of the following minimum types shall be supported:
i)
ii)
iii)
v)
4-20 mA,
0-20 mA,
0-10 volts,
2-10 volts.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 226
SPECIFICATIONS
Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and databases, including:
alarm
-
Control processes
Energy management applications
Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
for each point in the system.
Historical/trend data for points specified
Maintenance support applications
Custom processes
Operator I/O
Dial-up communications
Manual override monitoring
Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace
hardware.
Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so that the
implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input / output
termination module and wiring.
As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually
override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local, point
discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type points
and gradual switches for analog control type points.
DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that
automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity
information for reports.
Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both
local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions
or repeated failure to establish communication
In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC
Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 60 days.
Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention
Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability
of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or
from a network workstation.
17.3
Field Devices
By-pass valve -flanged linear valve pn16

08 March 2012
P a g e | 227
SPECIFICATIONS
Iron body with flanged end connections
Low seat leakage rate
Metal to metal seating for long life span
Self adjusting packing
Accurate positioning to ensure state of the art temperature control
Mounting of direct coupled electric actuators
Approved according to DIN 32730
Action Stem down to close
Nominal pressure rating PN16
Flow characteristic Equal percentage, ngl = 3.4
Range:
50:1
End connections Flanged per ISO 7005-2
Material Cast iron
Seat Stainless steel, replaceable
Stem Stainless steel
Packing Spring loaded PTFE cone rings
Medium temperature and pressure: 2...120 C; max. 1600 kPa
17.3.1 Control Valve
All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided with
characterized throttling plugs and shall be sized for minimum 25% of the system pressure
drop or 5 psi, whichever is less
Automatic control valves shall have threaded type and shall be ANSI-rated to withstand
the pressures and temperatures
Valves shall have metal-to-metal seats, stainless steel stems, and replaceable
Valves shall have a leakage rate of 0.05% CV or less
All two way water valves shall be provided with equal-percentage contoured throttling
Body Class: 150 psi
Models: V5011N1, two-way threaded globe valves for water
Pipe connection: Female NPT-threaded pipe connections
Seat: stainless steel, replaceable
Pattern: 2-way, straight-through.
Body Material: Red brass.
Body Trim
Bronze
Stem
Stainless Steel
Actuator
0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position
24 VAC/220VAC
17.3.2 Differential pressure switch for air filter
Max. operating
5000 Pa
Pressure connections: 2 plastic tubes 6.0 mm outside.
Switching capacity: 1.5 A/250 V~
Electrical connections: AMP connectors 6.3 x 0.8
17.3.3 Duct Temperature Sensor
Sensor with feature: wide sensing range, high accuracy, stainless steel probe
Electrical connection 2 x 1.5 mm cable
Ambient Limits temperature -35...+70 C
Humidity 595% RH, non-condensing
Protection standard: IP54
08 March 2012
P a g e | 228
SPECIFICATIONS
17.3.4 Thermostats
Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.
They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a temperature
change of one-tenth of one degree
Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions without
overlap
Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head centrifugals.
17.3.5 Electrical wiring
Install, connect and wire the items included under this work. This work includes providing
required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring shall be built in
conduit.
Provide wiring between thermostats, all control sensors
Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels, metering
instrumentation, indicating devices, and IBMS panels, as shown on the drawings or as
specified
All wiring to be compliant to local factory code.
Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 229
SPECIFICATIONS
17.4
Electrical INSTALLATION RELATED TO BAS
17.4.1 General
This Section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and
maintenance of all starting and control equipment including the main air-conditioning
switchboards, control panels, instruments, motors, switches, starters and control gears,
wires and cables, conduits and trunking and all accessories for the satisfactory operation
of all systems, complying fully with the latest edition of the Electrical Equipment of Factory
issued by CP-5 and all local rules in operation, for the efficient and satisfactory operation
of the installation
The Contractor shall lodge all applications or notices required by any local authority
having jurisdiction over the installation, and obtain all approvals necessary for the various
works to be carried out, and shall pay all fees in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the testing electrical switchboards and
insulation of all air-conditioning and ventilation systems by the local authorities having
jurisdiction over the installation, and shall pay all fees in connection therewith
Power supplies for the air-conditioning installation will be taken to the following points
under Electrical Installation
(1)
(2)
(3)
Main Air-Conditioning Switchboard as chiller, pumps, cooling tower,

Adjacent to each AHUs and FCUs
Adjacent to each supply and exhaust air fan
Basically, the Contractor shall provide the following:

Supply, installation and connection of the main air-conditioning switchboard, complete.
Supply, installation and connection of all power wiring from the main air-conditioning
switchboard to all electrical equipment of the central chilled water plant, and from the
power point to air-conditioning and ventilation systems.
Supply, installation and connection of all control circuit wiring of the air-conditioning and
ventilation systems.
Supply, installation and connection of motors, starters and contactors, et- and all
accessories associated with the air-conditioning and ventilation systems, together with
remote start/stop control and indication
Supply, installation and connection of all power wiring from the AHU & control panel to all
sensors and transmitter, and motorised dampers.
Provision of marshalling panel, 12V DC relay for on/off operation, interfacing relay for
status monitoring.

08 March 2012
P a g e | 230
SPECIFICATIONS
17.4.2 Main Air Conditioning Switchboards

The Contractor shall supply and install at positions as shown on the Drawings the main
air-conditioning switchboard.
The installation and connection of outgoing circuits for all air- conditioning equipment from
the Main Air-Conditioning switchboard, shall all be carried out by the Contractor.
The main air-conditioning switchboards shall incorporate indicating status and trip lights
for all pumps, chillers, cooling tower fans and all motorised butterfly valves.
NOTE: On main power supply failure the air-conditioning system in the Office Building and
mechanical ventilation in Outfitting Hall shall be isolated as to not operate on emergency
generators. The systems shall resume its operation on main power supply return to
normal. Therefore a signal from Incoming Station U/V relays shall be utilized to perform
this function.
17.4.3 Control Panels
The control panels shall be of totally enclosed, dust-proof cubicle units, fabricated from 14
gauge sheet steel. Where control panels are located in open areas exposed to weather
like roofs, the control panel enclosure shall be of the weatherproof type to IP 55 standard
Removal doors with hidden hinges and push-button catches or chromium plated fixing
centrifugals shall be provided in front and at rear of the units.
All control equipment together with motor starters and contractors shall be mounted on a
centre panel inside the unit if possible.
All switches, indicating lights and control system signal indications shall be mounted on
the panel.
Air insulated busbars of hard drawn high conductivity copper shall be rigidly supported
and painted to indicate phase with two costs of anti-sulphuric paint. Neutral busbar with
adequate number of terminals shall be provided. Earthbar shall be provided for earthing
of all equipment.
All outgoing circuit wirings shall be wired via insulated terminal strips mounted on the
centre panel. Wiring between terminal strips and equipment shall be neatly surface run to
approval
Circuit protection fuses shall be of high rupturing capacity type and fuse units shall be of
all insulated, black moulded type.
Each item of equipment shall be labelled to approval
Provision for installation of pipes or conduits shall be made in floor between the control
panels and the main air-conditioning switchboard, motors, starters and other equipment to
which control wiring will be connected
08 March 2012
P a g e | 231
SPECIFICATIONS
Prior to fabrication and installation, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings of
construction, layout and wiring diagram of the control panels for approval
18
LIFTS
18.1 Lifts
Two lifts shall be supplied for Office Building, one for personnel and one for canteen
goods.
Contractor shall design and supply the following elevators. The scope of supply and
services shall comprise, but is not limited to the following:
18.1.1 Lift 1:
18.1.2 Lift 2:
one electric traction lift with automatic cage & shaft doors;
with a capacity of 1000 kg;
number of persons 13;
a travel speed 1.0m/s;
travel height approximately13 meters;
4 stops
Ground floor
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Motor and gear equipment shall be installed on Level 3
Riser fuses 20A
Motor output at nominal load 5.7kW
one electric traction lift with automatic cage & shaft doors;
with a capacity of 800 kg;
a travel speed 0.5m/s;
travel height approximately 6 meters;
2 stops
Ground floor
Level 1
Motor and gear equipment shall be installed on Level 1
Riser fuses 20A
Motor output at nominal load 3kW
18.2 General;
All elevators shall be controlled by variable speed drives.
All required safety approvals and CE-marks in compliance with and according to the
Vietnam local regulations.
The Contractor shall coordinate and service the necessary activities that the elevators can
be safely used from the earliest stage as possible and during the construction period of the
Office. The necessary periodic checks and approvals from the Vietnam authorities are in
the scope of supply.
08 March 2012
P a g e | 232
SPECIFICATIONS
19 ATTACHMENTS
19.1 Consumer List

08 March 2012
P a g e | 233
No.
Description
Continuous
Intermittent
Stand-by
R
e
v
A1
A2
x
x
423.20
96.60
28.80
325.00
90.00
423.20
96.60
36.00
650.00
150.00
1.00
1.00
0.80
0.50
0.60
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.35
0.35
0.80
0.80
0.85
0.85
0.85
x
x
210.00
10.00
210.00
10.00
1.00
1.00
x
x x
x x
x x
583.00
120.00
5.44
102.40
26.00
832.00
130.00
6.40
120.00
40.00
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.92
0.85
0.85
0.65
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
58.00
3.00
47.04
90.00
20.00
15.00
58.00
3.00
49.04
93.00
35.00
17.50
x
x
x
x
34.60
3.00
180.00
13.68
34.60
3.00
188.00
15.20
x
x
x
x
x
x x
x x
x
x
159.12
24.48
155.52
17.00
27.36
636.48
16.00
176.80
27.20
172.80
27.00
30.40
707.20
16.00
x x
x x
x x
x
x
x
x
270.00
131.40
144.00
4.00
40.00
x
x
x
4.96
129.60
79.00
x
x
x
x
Lighting & small power

Emergency lighting
Chillers, fans and chiller pumps

Kitchen equipment
Hot water pumps
Water heaters
Elevators
x
x
General Store, Piping and

Small Steel Workshop
Emergency lighting
Fans, pumps
Mechanical machinery
Hand tools
Cranes
(E)
[kW]
(G)
[kW]
[kVA}
[kVar]
(F)
[kW]
[kVA}
[kVar]
[kVA}
[kVar]
Current
(H)
[A]
Remarks
Current
(I)
[A]
x
x
423.20
96.60
529.00
120.75
317.40
72.45
763.5
174.3
763.5
174.3
113.75
31.50
133.82
37.06
70.50
19.52
1576.8
436.7
3153.6
727.8
210.00
10.00
262.50
12.50
157.50
7.50
378.9
18.0
378.9
18.0
2.19
44.42
10.47
84.00
3.54
71.68
16.90
98.82
4.16
84.33
19.88
52.06
2.19
44.42
10.47
291.1
14.2
248.4
67.9
315.4
16.7
291.1
104.5
3.25
58.00
3.00
32.93
31.50
7.00
5.25
72.50
3.33
38.74
37.06
8.24
6.18
43.50
1.45
20.41
19.52
4.34
3.25
104.6
4.8
114.1
436.7
97.0
72.8
104.6
4.8
119.0
451.2
169.8
84.9
34.60
3.00
126.00
4.79
43.25
3.33
148.24
5.63
25.95
1.45
78.09
2.97
55.69
8.57
108.86
11.90
19.15
445.54
16.00
65.52
10.08
128.08
14.00
22.53
524.16
20.00
34.51
5.31
67.47
7.37
11.87
276.12
12.00
62.4
4.8
436.7
66.4
772.0
62.4
4.8
456.1
73.7
857.8
118.8
377.3
41.2
66.4
1544.0
28.9
132.0
419.2
65.5
73.7
1715.6
28.9
3.00
30.00
94.50
45.99
50.40
4.00
40.00
111.18
54.11
59.29
5.00
50.00
58.57
28.50
31.24
3.00
30.00
1310.0
637.5
698.6
7.2
72.2
1455.5
708.3
776.3
7.2
72.2
3.35
68.04
41.48
4.46
90.72
55.30
5.58
113.40
69.13
3.35
68.04
41.48
9.9
334.0
203.6
9.9
371.2
206.2
423.20
529.00
317.40
20.16
113.75
31.50
23.72
133.82
37.06
12.49
70.50
19.52
0.80
0.80
210.00
262.50
157.50
0.70
0.70
0.65
0.70
0.65
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
408.10
84.00
480.12
98.82
252.92
52.06
1.00
1.00
0.96
0.97
0.57
0.86
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.80
0.90
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
58.00
72.50
43.50
32.93
31.50
7.00
38.74
37.06
8.24
20.41
19.52
4.34
1.00
1.00
0.96
0.90
0.90
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.35
0.80
0.90
0.85
0.85
0.90
0.90
0.63
0.90
0.90
1.00
0.35
0.35
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
1.00
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.80
300.00
146.00
160.00
4.00
40.00
0.90
0.90
0.90
1.00
1.00
0.35
0.35
0.35
1.00
1.00
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.80
0.80
4.00
40.00
5.00
50.00
4.96
144.00
80.00
1.00
0.90
0.99
0.90
0.70
0.70
0.80
0.80
0.80
4.46
90.72
55.30
5.58
113.40
69.13
3.54
71.68
16.90
5.25
4.16
84.33
19.88
6.18
Carpentry and Electrical / HVAC

Workshop

Emergency lighting
Compressors
HVAC workshop machinery
Wood workshop machinery

Electrical workshop machinery
Fire pumps
Water supply pumps
Waste water pump
Storm water pump
Exterior lighting
x
x
x
x
34.60
43.25
25.95
126.00
4.79
148.24
5.63
78.09
2.97
55.69
8.57
65.52
10.08
34.51
5.31
11.90
14.00
7.37
16.00
20.00
19.15
445.54
22.53
524.16
11.87
276.12
94.50
45.99
50.40
111.18
54.11
59.29
58.57
28.50
31.24
12.00
Lift Control Room
Service station
Lighting and small power

PON building
Guardhouse
Time 12:45 PM
Revision
:0
Date
: 06.03.2012
Description/Issued for
: Review
By: Thuy
Seen by: KS
Client:
Standby and spares
Absobed Nominal
Offices & Amenities Building
Ship lifter
Jetty
Crane
Lighting and small power
Exterior lighting
0
Branch office
: HCMC
Department
: M&E
Order number
:1368
Document number1368/1
Continuous
Intermittent
Outfitting Hall

Emergency lighting
Fans, pumps
Hand tools & machinery
Cranes
0
Title:
CONSUMERS LIST
Client
:
Damen
Clients Project Numbe :
4318
Project
:
Shipyard
Plant Location
:
Hai Phong
Absorbed Motor
Loadfactor Efficency Powerfactor
at Load- at LoadLoad
Rating
factor C factor C
(A)
(B)
(C=A/B)
(D)
(E)
[kW]
[kW]
[-]
[%/100]
Cos(phi)
x
x
x
Page 1 of 2
Date 3/8/2012
No.
Description
TOTALS:
Subtotals Consumers List:
Continuous
Intermittent
Stand-by
R
e
v
Title:
CONSUMERS LIST
Client
:
Damen
Clients Project Numbe :
4318
Project
:
Shipyard
Plant Location
:
Hai Phong
Absorbed Motor
Loadfactor Efficency Powerfactor
at Load- at LoadLoad
Rating
factor C factor C
(A)
(B)
(C=A/B)
(D)
(E)
[kW]
[kW]
[-]
[%/100]
Cos(phi)
4323.68
Branch office
: HCMC
Department
: M&E
Order number
:1368
Document number1368/1
Continuous
Intermittent
Revision
:0
Date
: 06.03.2012
Description/Issued for
: Review
By: Thuy
Seen by: KS
Client:
Standby and spares
Absobed Nominal
(E)
[kW]
(G)
[kW]
5236.90
[kVA}
1872.17
[kVar]
1282.22
(F)
[kW]
[kVA}
[kVar]
752.94
466.63 2418.32
[kVA}
[kVar]
Current
(H)
[A]
Remarks
Current
(I)
[A]
1633.77 11591.75 14374.56
CALCULATIONS:
Total Continuos Load(A1)
1872.17 [kW]
Maximum Running Load:
(A1 x D1) + (B1 x D2)
2437.90 [kW]
(E1)
1282.22 [kVar]
Maximum Running Load:
(A3 x D1) + (B3 x D2)
2928.07 [kVA]
(E2)
2269.17 [kVA]
Maximum Running Current:
(E2 * 1000) / (sqrt 3 * 400)
4226.30 [A]
(E1/E2)
Total Intermittent Loa(B1)
752.94 [kW]
Cos(phi1) at Max. running Load:
466.63 [kVar]
Required Cos(phi2) at Max. running load
885.82 [kVA]
phi1 =
33.63
[degrees]
phi2 =
11.48
[degrees]
Total Standby Load (C1)
0.83 [-]
(E3)
0.98 [-]
(E4)
2418.32 [kW]
501.77 [kVar]
2469.82 [kVA]
Required capacitor rating
E1 x (tan(phi1)-tan(phi2))
1126.76 [kVar]
NOTE:
Coin. factor Continuo(D1)
0.9 [-]
1. During generator supply do not feed HVAC of Office and Outfitting Hall
Coin. factor Intermitte(D2)
1.0 [-]
2. Selection of receivers for emergency supply was done based on production, safety and security requirements during frequent power cut-offs
Coin. factor Stand-by(D3)
1.0 [-]
Time 12:45 PM
Page 2 of 2
Date 3/8/2012

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory M&E Specification: Electrical Installation

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory M&E Specification: Electrical Installation

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

DAMEN SONG CAM SHIPYARDS

HAI PHONG CITY

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Company

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Project

Damen Song Cam Shipyards Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Company

Mr. Meindert Wiersma

10th January 2012

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Mr.Gerrit Jan Van Ommen (ProjectDirector)

Mr. Meindert Wiersma (Senior Project Manager)

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Quality and reliability

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Standards & Regulations

Reliable, good quality, flexible, easy to maintain and accessible.

1.3.2 Climate conditions

Hai Phong, Vietnam

1.3.2.2 Design Conditions

1.3.3 Performances for the buildings

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

1.4.3 Power distribution installation

1.4.3.4 Power distribution in General Store building

1.4.3.8 Power distribution general

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

1.4.7 Communication installations

1.4.8 Protection installations

1.4.9 Transport installations

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Examination of Site and Drawings

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Permits, Fees and Inspections

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Shop Drawings, Builders Work Drawing and Material Submittals

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Record (as-built) drawings

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Operational and Maintenance Manuals

Low Current Systems.

Fire alarm system.

UPS lighting system.

Plumbing and Drainage.

Fire and Safety.

Any Services other than above.

b. The minimum information required is as follows:

Detailed description of systems operation.

Procedures for Preventive, regular and the breakdown maintenance, with

Commissioning data for all Systems / Equipment.

List of recommended spares.

Country of Origin Certificate

Upon approval of the draft by the Consultant, submit 4 set of manuals to

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory

Damen Song Cam Shipyard Factory